HARRIS TR-0051-E M7300/M5300 Mobile Radio User Manual Manual
HARRIS CORPORATION M7300/M5300 Mobile Radio Manual
  
    HARRIS   >  
Contents
- 1. Manual
 - 2. Manual 1
 - 3. Manual 2
 - 4. Manual 3
 
Manual

Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc.  Client: M/A-COM, Inc. 
360 Herndon Parkway  Model: M7300/M5300 Mobile Radio 
Suite 1400  FCC ID: OWDTR-0051-E/IC: 3636B-0051 
Herndon, VA 20170  Standards:  FCC Part 90/IC RSS-119 
http://www.rheintech.com Report #:  2008095 
Appendix L:  Manual   
Please refer to the following pages for the Operator’s Manual and the Installation Manual. 
 63 of 67     

Operator’s Manual 
MM-014716-001 
May/08 
M/A-COM 
M7300 Series 
Digital Mobile Radio 

MM-014716-001 
2 
MANUAL REVISION HISTORY 
REV  DATE  REASON FOR CHANGE 
- May/08 Initial Release. 
M/A-COM Technical Publications would particularly appreciate feedback on any errors found in this document and 
suggestions on how the document could be improved. Submit your comments and suggestions to: 
Tyco Electronics Wireless Systems Segment    or fax your comments to:  1-434-455-6851 
M/A-COM, Inc. 
Technical Publications          or e-mail us at:  techpubs@tycoelectronics.com 
221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 
Lynchburg, VA 24501 
CREDITS 
This device is made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 
5,185,796; 5,271,017; 5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,497; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. 
The voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, 
copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this technology is explicitly prohibited from 
attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into 
human-readable form. 
EDACS and OpenSky are registered trademarks of M/A-COM, Inc. ProVoice is a trademark of M/A-COM 
All other brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders. 
NOTICE! 
This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC.  Do not dispose of this product in a 
public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. 
This manual covers M/A-COM products manufactured and sold by M/A-COM, Inc. 
Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any 
repairs, alterations or substitutions of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the 
manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer's warranty. 
This manual is published by M/A-COM, Inc., without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated 
by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made 
by M/A-COM, Inc., at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No 
part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including 
photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of M/A-COM, Inc. 
Copyright© 2008, M/A-COM, Inc. All rights reserved. 

MM-014716-001 
3 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTION....................................................................................................9 
2 RF ENERGY EXPOSURE INFORMATION ...................................................................................10 
2.1 RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AWARENESS, CONTROL INFORMATION, AND OPERATION 
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FCC OCCUPATIONAL USE REQUIREMENTS ..............................10 
2.1.1 Federal Communications Commission Regulations......................................................10 
2.2 COMPLIANCE WITH RF EXPOSURE STANDARDS...........................................................11 
2.2.1 Mobile Antennas............................................................................................................11 
2.2.2 Approved Accessories ...................................................................................................12 
2.2.3 Contact Information.......................................................................................................12 
3 OPERATION SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS............................................................................13 
3.1 TRANSMITTER HAZARDS.....................................................................................................13 
3.2 SAFE DRIVING RECOMMENDATIONS................................................................................13 
4 OPERATING RULES AND REGULATIONS..................................................................................14 
4.1 OPERATING TIPS.....................................................................................................................14 
5 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................15 
5.1 REMOTE CONTROL HEAD OPERATION.............................................................................15 
6 CHANGE OPERATING MODE ........................................................................................................16 
6.1 CHANGE FROM OTP MODE...................................................................................................16 
6.2 CHANGE TO OTP MODE.........................................................................................................16 
7 OPENSKY OPERATION....................................................................................................................17 
7.1 CH721 FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS .................................................................................17 
7.2 POWER UP AND VOLUME CONTROL .................................................................................18 
7.2.1 Power Up.......................................................................................................................18 
7.2.2 Volume Control.............................................................................................................19 
7.3 SELF-TEST.................................................................................................................................19 
7.4 LOGIN TO THE NETWORK ....................................................................................................19 
7.5 LOG OFF THE NETWORK.......................................................................................................20 
7.6 TURNING THE RADIO OFF....................................................................................................20 
7.7 MENU DISPLAY AND CONTROL AREA..............................................................................20 
7.8 RADIO STATUS ICONS...........................................................................................................21 
7.9 DWELL DISPLAY.....................................................................................................................21 
7.10 PERSONALITY .........................................................................................................................21 
7.10.1 Profiles...........................................................................................................................21 
7.10.2 Talk Groups...................................................................................................................22 
7.11 ALERT TONES..........................................................................................................................23 
7.12 BASIC MENU STRUCTURE....................................................................................................23 
7.13 DUAL-TONE MULTI-FREQUENCY.......................................................................................26 
7.14 KEYPAD COMMANDS (SYSTEM MODEL CONTROL HEAD)..........................................26 
7.14.1 Password Entry..............................................................................................................26 
7.14.2 DTMF Overdial.............................................................................................................27 
7.15 CHANGING THE ACTIVE PROFILE......................................................................................27 
7.16 CHECKING OR CHANGING THE SELECTED TALK GROUP............................................27 
7.17 ADJUSTING DISPLAY AND BUTTON BACKLIGHT BRIGHTNESS.................................27 

MM-014716-001 
4 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
7.18 STEALTH MODE ......................................................................................................................27 
7.18.1 Enabling Stealth Mode ..................................................................................................28 
7.18.2 Disabling Stealth Mode .................................................................................................28 
7.19 ADJUSTING SIDE TONE AUDIO LEVEL..............................................................................28 
7.20 CHANGE OPERATING MODE................................................................................................28 
7.21 RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING VOICE CALLS............................................................29 
7.21.1 Receiving a Voice Call..................................................................................................29 
7.21.2 Transmitting a Voice Call..............................................................................................29 
7.22 ADJUSTING AUDIO TREBLE LEVEL ...................................................................................29 
7.23 INTERCOM MODE ...................................................................................................................30 
7.24 TALK GROUP LOCK OUT.......................................................................................................30 
7.24.1 Lock Out a Talk Group..................................................................................................31 
7.24.2 Unlock a Talk Group .....................................................................................................31 
7.25 SCANNING ................................................................................................................................31 
7.25.1 Checking or Changing Active Scan Mode ....................................................................32 
7.25.2 Scanning Priority...........................................................................................................33 
7.26 MAKING SELECTIVE CALLS ................................................................................................33 
7.26.1 Manually Dialing a Selective Call (System Model Control Head)................................34 
7.26.2 Speed Dialing a Selective Call ......................................................................................34 
7.26.3 Receiving a Selective Call.............................................................................................34 
7.26.4 Terminating a Selective Call .........................................................................................34 
7.27 SELECTIVE ALERT..................................................................................................................35 
7.27.1 Sending Selective Alert Messages.................................................................................35 
7.27.2 Receiving Messages.......................................................................................................36 
7.27.3 Defining Pre-Programmed Messages ............................................................................36 
7.28 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS (SYSTEM MODEL CONTROL HEAD) ..............36 
7.28.1 Placing an Interconnect Call..........................................................................................36 
7.28.2 Receiving an Interconnect Call......................................................................................37 
7.29 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS......................................................................................37 
7.29.1 Declaring an Emergency Call or Alert ..........................................................................37 
7.29.2 Silent Emergency...........................................................................................................38 
7.29.3 Clearing an Emergency Call or Alert ............................................................................38 
7.29.4 Receiving an Emergency Call .......................................................................................39 
7.29.5 Dismissing an Emergency Call......................................................................................39 
7.30 ENCRYPTION ...........................................................................................................................40 
7.30.1 Automatic Encryption....................................................................................................40 
7.30.2 Manual Encryption (System Model) .............................................................................40 
7.31 PRESET BUTTONS...................................................................................................................41 
7.32 DYNAMIC REGROUPING.......................................................................................................41 
7.33 GPS COORDINATES ................................................................................................................42 
8 P25/EDACS/CONVENTIONAL COMMON OPERATION ...........................................................43 
8.1 CH721 FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS .................................................................................43 
8.1.1 Primary Functions (Quick Access)................................................................................45 
8.2 TURNING THE RADIO ON......................................................................................................45 
8.3 SELECTION MODE RULES.....................................................................................................45 
8.4 DIRECT ACCESS ......................................................................................................................46 

MM-014716-001 
5 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
8.5 FEATURE ENCRYPTION DISPLAY.......................................................................................46 
8.5.1 Serial Number ROM (12 Hex Digits)............................................................................47 
8.5.2 Feature Encryption Data Stream....................................................................................47 
8.5.3 Features Enabled............................................................................................................48 
8.6 SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL SELECTION............................................................................49 
8.6.1 System Selection............................................................................................................49 
8.6.2 Group and Channel Selection........................................................................................49 
8.7 LAST SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL RECALL.......................................................................50 
8.8 DIGITAL VOICE OPERATION (PROVOICE) ........................................................................50 
8.8.1 Voice Modes..................................................................................................................50 
8.8.2 Clear Modes...................................................................................................................50 
8.8.3 ProVoice Digital Mode..................................................................................................51 
8.8.4 ProVoice Private Mode .................................................................................................51 
8.8.5 Private Operation...........................................................................................................52 
8.8.6 Conventional Operation.................................................................................................53 
8.9 MACRO KEY OPERATION .....................................................................................................54 
9 EDACS AND P25 TRUNKED OPERATION....................................................................................55 
9.1 RADIO STATUS ICONS...........................................................................................................55 
9.2 MESSAGES................................................................................................................................56 
9.3 ALERT TONES..........................................................................................................................58 
9.4 MENU.........................................................................................................................................59 
9.5 RECEIVING A CALL................................................................................................................62 
9.6 SENDING A CALL....................................................................................................................62 
9.7 CONVENTIONAL FAILSOFT..................................................................................................62 
9.8 EMERGENCY OPERATION ....................................................................................................63 
9.8.1 Receiving an Emergency Call .......................................................................................63 
9.8.2 Declaring an Emergency................................................................................................63 
9.9 SYSTEM SCAN OPERATION..................................................................................................63 
9.9.1 Wide Area System Scan ................................................................................................63 
9.9.2 ProScan..........................................................................................................................64 
9.9.3 Priority System Scan .....................................................................................................64 
9.9.4 When Wide Area System Scan Is Enabled....................................................................64 
9.9.5 When ProScan Is Enabled .............................................................................................64 
9.9.6 Menu Selection..............................................................................................................64 
9.9.7 Pre-Programmed Keypad Key.......................................................................................64 
9.10 GROUP SCAN OPERATION....................................................................................................65 
9.10.1 Adding Groups to a Scan List........................................................................................65 
9.10.2 Deleting Groups from a Scan List .................................................................................65 
9.10.3 Nuisance Delete.............................................................................................................66 
9.10.4 Turning Scan On............................................................................................................66 
9.10.5 Priority Group Scanning................................................................................................66 
9.10.6 Turning Scan Off...........................................................................................................66 
9.11 INDIVIDUAL CALLS ...............................................................................................................67 
9.11.1 Receiving and Responding to an Individual Call ..........................................................67 
9.11.2 Call Storage Lists...........................................................................................................67 
9.11.3 Sending an Individual Call ............................................................................................68 

MM-014716-001 
6 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
9.12 SCAT OPERATION...................................................................................................................68 
9.13 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS.................................................................................69 
9.13.1 Receiving a Telephone Interconnect Call (Trunked Mode Only) .................................69 
9.13.2 Sending a Telephone Interconnect Call (Trunked Mode Only).....................................69 
9.13.3 DTMF Overdial/Conventional Mode Telephone Interconnect......................................69 
9.13.4 Programmable Entries ...................................................................................................70 
9.14 MOBILE DATA .........................................................................................................................70 
9.14.1 Displays .........................................................................................................................71 
9.14.2 DATA OFF Operation...................................................................................................71 
9.14.3 DATA ON Operation ....................................................................................................71 
9.14.4 Exiting Data Calls..........................................................................................................71 
9.14.5 Scan Lockout Mode.......................................................................................................72 
9.14.6 Data Lockout Mode.......................................................................................................72 
9.15 STATUS/MESSAGE OPERATION ..........................................................................................72 
9.15.1 Status Operation ............................................................................................................73 
9.15.2 Message Operation ........................................................................................................73 
9.16 EDACS CONVENTIONAL P1 SCAN ......................................................................................73 
9.17 DYNAMIC REGROUP OPERATION.......................................................................................74 
9.17.1 Emergency Operation....................................................................................................74 
9.18 PAGE (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) ................................................................................................74 
10 CONVENTIONAL OPERATION......................................................................................................75 
10.1 RADIO STATUS ICONS...........................................................................................................75 
10.2 MESSAGES................................................................................................................................75 
10.3 ALERT TONES..........................................................................................................................77 
10.4 MENU.........................................................................................................................................77 
10.5 RECEIVING A CALL................................................................................................................79 
10.6 SENDING A CALL....................................................................................................................80 
10.7 EMERGENCY OPERATION ....................................................................................................80 
10.7.1 Using 5-Tone Signaling to Declare an Emergency .......................................................80 
10.7.2 Tone Encode Transmission............................................................................................81 
10.8 SCANNING CONVENTIONAL CHANNELS .........................................................................81 
10.8.1 Adding Channels to a Scan List.....................................................................................81 
10.8.2 Deleting Channels From A Scan List............................................................................82 
10.8.3 Nuisance Delete.............................................................................................................82 
10.9 TURNING SCAN ON ................................................................................................................82 
10.10 TURNING SCAN OFF...............................................................................................................82 
10.11 SQUELCH ADJUST...................................................................................................................83 
10.11.1 Menu Selection..............................................................................................................83 
10.11.2 Pre-Programmed Keypad Key.......................................................................................83 
10.12 TYPE 99 DECODE.....................................................................................................................83 
10.12.1 Menu Selection..............................................................................................................84 
10.12.2 Pre-Programmed Keypad Key.......................................................................................84 
10.13 DIRECT MODE OPERATION..................................................................................................84 
11 P25 CONVENTIONAL OPERATION...............................................................................................85 
11.1 RADIO STATUS ICONS...........................................................................................................85 

MM-014716-001 
7 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
11.2 MESSAGES................................................................................................................................86 
11.3 ALERT TONES..........................................................................................................................87 
11.4 MENU.........................................................................................................................................88 
11.5 GROUP CALLS IN P25 MODE ................................................................................................90 
11.5.1 Transmitting a Group Call.............................................................................................90 
11.5.2 Receiving a Group Call .................................................................................................90 
11.6 INDIVIDUAL CALLS IN P25 MODE ......................................................................................91 
11.6.1 Transmitting an Individual Call.....................................................................................91 
11.6.2 Receiving an Individual Call .........................................................................................91 
11.7 EMERGENCY GROUP CALLS IN P25 MODE.......................................................................91 
11.7.1 Declaring an Emergency Group Call.............................................................................91 
11.7.2 Receiving an Emergency Group Call ............................................................................92 
12 BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING..........................................................................................................93 
13 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE..............................................................................................................95 
14 KEYPAD REMAPPING......................................................................................................................96 
15 RADIO SETUP.....................................................................................................................................97 
16 WARRANTY ......................................................................................................................................101 

MM-014716-001 
8 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
FIGURES 
Figure 7-1: System Model.......................................................................................................................17 
Figure 7-2: Scan Model...........................................................................................................................17 
Figure 7-3: Typical Display.....................................................................................................................20 
Figure 7-4: Personality Structure Example .............................................................................................22 
Figure 8-1: System Model.......................................................................................................................43 
Figure 8-2: Scan Model...........................................................................................................................43 
Figure 9-1: Typical Display.....................................................................................................................55 
Figure 10-1: Typical Display...................................................................................................................75 
Figure 11-1: Typical Display...................................................................................................................85 
TABLES 
Table 2-1: Rated Power and Recommended Minimum Safe Lateral Distance.......................................11 
Table 7-1: Front Panel Default Controls and Functions..........................................................................18 
Table 7-2: Icons and Descriptions...........................................................................................................21 
Table 7-3: M7300 OpenSky Mode Alert Tones......................................................................................23 
Table 7-4: Basic Menu Structure.............................................................................................................24 
Table 7-5: Keypad Function Commands.................................................................................................26 
Table 7-6: Scan Modes............................................................................................................................32 
Table 7-7: Status of Selective Alert.........................................................................................................36 
Table 8-1: Front Panel Default Controls and Functions..........................................................................44 
Table 8-2: Available Feature Numbers ...................................................................................................48 
Table 8-3:  Transmit/Receive Mode Compatibility for ProVoice Operation..........................................50 
Table 8-4: Current Cryptographic Key Display ......................................................................................52 
Table 9-1: Icons and Descriptions...........................................................................................................55 
Table 9-2: Display Messages...................................................................................................................56 
Table 9-3: Alert Tones.............................................................................................................................58 
Table 9-4: Menu Item Information..........................................................................................................60 
Table 10-1: Icons and Descriptions.........................................................................................................75 
Table 10-2: Display Messages.................................................................................................................75 
Table 10-3: M7300 EDACS Mode Alert Tones......................................................................................77 
Table 10-4: Menu Item Information........................................................................................................78 
Table 11-1: Icons and Descriptions.........................................................................................................85 
Table 11-2: Display Messages.................................................................................................................86 
Table 11-3: M7300 EDACS Mode Alert Tones......................................................................................87 
Table 11-4: Menu Item Information........................................................................................................88 
Table 12-1: Basic Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................93 

MM-014716-001 
9 
1  SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTION 
The following conventions are used throughout this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions 
that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply 
with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of 
design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. M/A-COM, Inc. assumes no liability for the 
customer’s failure to comply with these standards. 
The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, 
if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury.  Do not 
proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully 
understood or met.  
CAUTION  
The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, 
which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in a risk of danger, damage 
to the equipment, or severely degrade the equipment performance. 
The  NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve 
system performance or clarify a process or procedure. 
The ESD symbol calls attention to procedures, practices, or the like, which could expose 
equipment to the effects of Electro-Static Discharge. Proper precautions must be taken 
to prevent ESD when handling circuit modules. 

MM-014716-001 
10 
2  RF ENERGY EXPOSURE INFORMATION 
2.1  RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AWARENESS, CONTROL INFORMATION, 
AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FCC OCCUPATIONAL USE 
REQUIREMENTS 
Before using your mobile two-way radio, read this important RF energy awareness and control 
information and operational instructions to ensure compliance with the FCC’s RF exposure 
guidelines. 
This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full 
knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC 
limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any 
other use. 
CAUTION  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by M/A-COM, Inc. could void the 
user's authority to operate the equipment. 
This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide 
communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses RF energy or radio waves to send and 
receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited 
to, electric power, sunlight, and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other 
forms of electromagnetic energy, which, when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high 
levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. 
Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop 
standards for exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for 
both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins 
of protection. All two-way radios marketed in North America are designed, manufactured, and tested to 
ensure they meet government established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend 
specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they 
inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. Please refer 
to the following websites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your 
exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. 
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html 
http://www.osha.gov./SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html 
2.1.1 Federal Communications Commission Regulations 
Your M/A COM, Inc. M7300 mobile two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with the FCC RF 
energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before it can be marketed in the United States. When 
two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of 
and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be 
facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your M/A COM, 
Inc. M7300 two-way radio has an RF exposure product label. Also, your M7300 Installation and 
Operator’s Manuals include information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure 
and to satisfy compliance requirements. 

MM-014716-001 
11 
2.2  COMPLIANCE WITH RF EXPOSURE STANDARDS 
Your MA/COM, Inc. M7300 mobile two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of 
national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to RF 
electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for 
occupational/controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50% listen and is 
authorized by the FCC for occupational use. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the 
FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting 
(talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 
Your M/A COM, Inc. M7300 mobile two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure 
standards and guidelines: 
• United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR §§ 
2 sub-part J. 
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 
C95.1-2005. 
• Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-2005. 
• IC standard RSS-102, Issue 2, 2005: “Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio 
Standards Specification.  Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus 
(All Frequency Bands). 
CAUTION  
Table 2-1 lists the recommended minimum lateral distance for a controlled environment 
and for unaware bystanders in an uncontrolled environment, from transmitting types of 
antennas (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at rated radio power for 
mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Transmit only when unaware bystanders are at least 
the uncontrolled recommended minimum lateral distance away from the transmitting 
antenna. 
2.2.1 Mobile Antennas 
Table 2-1: Rated Power and Recommended Minimum Safe Lateral Distance 
MOBILE RADIO 
FREQUENCY 
SPLIT 
ANTENNA PART 
NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
RSAFE 
CONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(CM) 
RSAFE 
UNCONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(CM) 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-002  Dual Band 700/800, 
Elevated Feed, Roof Mount   28 69 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-005  Combined GPS/700/800, 
Elevated Feed, Roof Mount   28 69 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-015  Combined GPS/764-870, 
Roof Mount   39 87 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-010  Dual Band 700/800, Low 
Profile, Roof Mount   28 69 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-006  Dual Band 700/800, 
Magnetic Mount   29 72 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-011  Combined GPS/700/800, 
Low Profile, Roof Mount   28 69 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-001  Dual Band 700/800, Roof 
Mount   28 69 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-004  Combined GPS/764-870, 
Roof Mount   28 69 

MM-014716-001 
12 
MOBILE RADIO 
FREQUENCY 
SPLIT 
ANTENNA PART 
NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
RSAFE 
CONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(CM) 
RSAFE 
UNCONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(CM) 
700/800 MHz  AN-025167-014  Dual Band 764-870, Roof 
Mount   39 87 
Install the radio’s antenna (refer to Table 2-1 for applicable antenna part numbers) in the center of the 
vehicle’s roof. These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or 
vehicles with appropriate ground planes. The antenna installation should additionally be in accordance 
with the following: 
• The requirements of the antenna manufacturer/supplier included with the antenna. 
• Instructions in the M7300 Radio Installation Manual, including minimum antenna cable lengths. 
• The installation manual providing specific information of how to install the antennas to facilitate 
recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. 
Use only the M/A-COM approved/supplied antenna(s) or approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized 
antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may violate FCC regulations. 
2.2.2 Approved Accessories 
This radio has been tested and meets the FCC RF guidelines when used with the M/A-COM accessories 
supplied or designated for use with this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with 
the FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, and may violate FCC regulations. 
For a list of M/A-COM approved accessories refer to the product manuals, M/A-COM’s Products and 
Services Catalog, or contact M/A-COM at 1-800-368-3277. 
2.2.3 Contact Information 
For additional information on exposure requirements or other information, contact M/A-COM, Inc. at 
1-800-528-7711 or at http://www.macom-wireless.com. 

MM-014716-001 
13 
3 OPERATION SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS 
3.1 TRANSMITTER HAZARDS 
The operator of any mobile radio should be aware of certain hazards common to 
the operation of vehicular radio transmitters. A list of several possible hazards is 
given: 
• Explosive Atmospheres – Just as it is dangerous to fuel a vehicle with the motor running, similar 
hazards exist when operating a mobile radio. Be sure to turn the radio off while fueling a vehicle. Do 
not carry containers of fuel in the trunk of a vehicle if the radio is mounted in the trunk. 
Areas with potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. Turn OFF 
your radio when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that 
the radio or its accessories could generate sparks. 
• Interference to Vehicular Electronics Systems – Electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-
skid braking systems, electronic cruise control systems, etc., are typical electronic systems that can 
malfunction due to the lack of protection from radio frequency energy present when transmitting. If 
the vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer and enlist their aid in determining the 
expected performance of electronic circuits when the radio is transmitting. 
• Electric Blasting Caps – To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use 
two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the “Turn off Two-Way 
Radios” signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard: 1926-900) 
• Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gas Powered Vehicles – Mobile radio installations in vehicles powered 
by liquefied petroleum gas with the LP gas container in the trunk or other sealed-off space within the 
interior of the vehicle must conform to the National Fire Protection Association standard NFPA 58 
requiring: 
¾ The LP gas container and its fittings. 
¾ Outside filling connections shall be used for the LP gas container. 
¾ The LP gas container shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 
3.2  SAFE DRIVING RECOMMENDATIONS 
(Recommended by AAA) 
• Read the literature on the safe operation of the radio. 
• Keep both hands on the steering wheel and the microphone in its hanger whenever the vehicle is in 
motion. 
• Place calls only when the vehicle is stopped. 
• When talking from a moving vehicle is unavoidable, drive in the slower lane. Keep conversations 
brief. 
• If a conversation requires taking notes or complex thought, stop the vehicle in a safe place and 
continue the call. 
• Whenever using a mobile radio, exercise caution. 

MM-014716-001 
14 
4  OPERATING RULES AND REGULATIONS 
Two-way FM radio systems must be operated in accordance with the rules and regulations of the local, 
regional, or national government. 
In the United States, the M7300 mobile radio must be operated in accordance with the rules and 
regulations of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). As an operator of two-way radio 
equipment, you must be thoroughly familiar with the rules that apply to your particular type of radio 
operation. Following these rules helps eliminate confusion, assures the most efficient use of the existing 
radio channels, and results in a smoothly functioning radio network. 
When using your two-way radio, remember these rules: 
• It is a violation of FCC rules to interrupt any distress or emergency message. As your radio operates 
in much the same way as a telephone “party line,” always listen to make sure that the channel is clear 
before transmitting. Emergency calls have priority over all other messages. If someone is sending an 
emergency message – such as reporting a fire or asking for help in an accident – KEEP OFF THE 
AIR! 
• The use of profane or obscene language is prohibited by Federal law. 
• It is against the law to send false call letters or false distress or emergency messages. The FCC 
requires that you keep conversations brief and confine them to business. To save time, use coded 
messages whenever possible. 
• Using your radio to send personal messages (except in an emergency) is a violation of FCC rules. 
You may send only those messages that are essential for the operation of your business. 
• It is against Federal law to repeat or otherwise make known anything you overhear on your radio. 
Conversations between others sharing your channel must be regarded as confidential. 
• The FCC requires that you identify yourself at certain specific times by means of your call letters. 
Refer to the rules that apply to your particular type of operation for the proper procedure. 
• No changes or adjustments shall be made to the equipment except by an authorized or certified 
electronics technician. 
Under U.S. law, operation of an unlicensed radio transmitter within the jurisdiction of 
the United States may be punishable by a fine of up to $10,000, imprisonment for up to 
two (2) years, or both. 
4.1 OPERATING TIPS 
The following conditions tend to reduce the effective range of two-way radios and should be avoided 
whenever possible: 
• Operating the radio in areas of low terrain, or while under power lines or bridges. 
• Obstructions such as mountains and buildings. 
• In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement can be obtained by moving a few 
yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation. 

MM-014716-001 
15 
5 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 
The M7300 mobile is a state-of-the-art radio that operates seamlessly between the 800 MHz frequency 
band and the 700 MHz frequency band. The M7300 is designed to meet the critical communications 
demands of public service users and complies with MIL-STD-810F specifications. 
The M7300 is capable of supporting multiple operating modes, including OpenSky digital operation, 
EDACS or ProVoice trunked modes, P25 digital trunked mode, P25 digital conventional mode, and 
conventional analog mode.   
The M7300 uses Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) technology in the OpenSky mode to allow 
multiple users to share a single RF channel. In addition, a single RF channel can support simultaneous 
digital voice and data communications. 
The M7300 provides integrated voice and data services. Voice operation is provided using a microphone 
and speaker included in the radio installation kit. For data transfers, the M7300 is constructed with an 
industry-standard RS-232 interface serial port for connecting an optional laptop PC. 
A PC, not included with the M7300, provides network connectivity through the standard serial 
(DCE-type) interface. 
The M7300 has an integrated Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver. This allows the M7300 to fully 
support the Automatic Vehicular Locator (AVL) for fleet management and dispatch applications. 
The OpenSky M7300 benefits from a flexible, software-based digital radio design. Features and user 
profiles are software-defined and can be reprogrammed over the air. The optional over-the-air 
programming feature allows communication protocols to be changed easily and added at any time. 
5.1  REMOTE CONTROL HEAD OPERATION 
For remote mount installations configured with a CH721 control head, all normal radio operations and 
interfaces can be handled via the control head connected to the radio unit by a single twisted-pair 
connection routed through a vehicle. Up to six control units may be attached to a trunk mount radio. Each 
control head provides a serial access point for data and any one (only one at a time) can be connected to a 
data device such as a personal computer. 
Where multiple control heads are connected or where a dash-mount radio is installed with additional 
remote control heads, the following features are available from each position: 
• Outgoing voice calls can be initiated. Any control head can initiate a call but only one can talk at a 
time. All other connected control heads will hear both sides of the conversation. 
• Incoming and outgoing audio can be heard. Outgoing audio is not broadcast at the source position. 
• Independent audio control is available. 
• Radio settings such as talk group, scan mode etc., can be controlled. Any connected control head can 
override the radio settings of other connected control heads. 
• Comfort settings, such as volume and display brightness that are applicable to the individual control 
head can be adjusted and cannot be overridden by other control heads. 
• An optional intercom function is available between control units. Audio will be broadcast to ALL 
connected control heads. 

MM-014716-001 
16 
6  CHANGE OPERATING MODE 
6.1  CHANGE FROM OTP MODE 
To change from OTP operating mode to P25, EDACS, or Conventional: 
1. Use   to cycle through the menu until the “Mode Menu” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. 
2. Use   to choose an available mode. Press MENU and confirm (Y/N) with   and press 
MENU again. 
3. Press the MENU button to confirm.  
6.2  CHANGE TO OTP MODE 
1. Use   to scroll through available systems until OpenSky is displayed.  
2. The radio transitions to OTP mode. 

MM-014716-001 
17 
7 OPENSKY OPERATION 
7.1  CH721 FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS 
The front panel of the control head includes a dot matrix display, controls for menu navigation, an 
emergency button, three pre-set buttons, a Power On-Off/Volume Control knob, and a microphone 
connector. In addition, the system model control head features a DTMF keypad. Table 7-1 lists all default 
front panel controls and their functions. 
Figure 7-1: System Model 
Figure 7-2: Scan Model 

MM-014716-001 
18 
The buttons on the front panel are backlit for operation in a low ambient light level such as nighttime 
operation. Some buttons also flash to provide feedback of various operating conditions. 
In addition, the front panel contains a light-level sensor that samples ambient light levels for automatic 
display and button backlight brightness adjustments. In other words, it automatically brightens the display 
and backlights when higher external light levels exist and it automatically dims the display and backlights 
during lower external light levels. 
Table 7-1: Front Panel Default Controls and Functions 
PART  FUNCTION 
Power On-
Off/Volume Control 
knob 
Turn knob clockwise to power on the radio and increase volume. 
Turn counter-clockwise to decrease volume and power off the radio. 
Mic Connection Connection for hand-held, hands-free, speaker-mic, or headset. 
If enabled through programming, the emergency button sends an emergency alert and opens 
voice communication on the currently selected talk group or the default emergency talk group 
(depending upon how the system is defined). 
Ambient Light 
Sensor  Radio automatically adjusts the display and button backlight brightness level based on 
ambient light. Do not block this sensor. 
 or   
While in the dwell display, scrolls through available talk groups. 
Scrolls through selections within the active menu (available talk groups, pre-programmed 
speed dial numbers, canned alert messages, etc.). 
OPT/OPTION 
CLR/CLEAR 
Scrolls through available menu items. 
MENU Press to activate the current selection. In some cases, this is not necessary as the last 
selection will automatically activate after a short period. 
Display Area 
Menu selections and messages. 
Network Connectivity icon. 
Current Volume Level icon. 
Volume represented numerically within the display (0 = Muted, 40 = Loudest). 
User may select which one of several dwell displays the radio uses. 
Pre-Set Buttons 
A, B, & C 
These buttons are used to store and recall user-selectable parameters such as scan mode, 
selected profile, selected talk group, and priority talk group. Different parameters can be 
stored at each of the three different pre-set buttons. 
Preset button C can be configured via programming to reboot the radio into a particular 
application mode. Contact your system administrator to determine if this feature is enabled in 
your radio. 
SCAN  Not functional in OpenSky systems. 
7.2  POWER UP AND VOLUME CONTROL 
7.2.1 Power Up 
1. Rotate the Power On-Off/Volume Control knob clockwise to power on the radio. The display will 
illuminate when the radio powers up.  

MM-014716-001 
19 
2. Wait for the power-up sequence to complete, which takes approximately ten (10) seconds. 
During this time, if enabled for auto registration, the radio is provisioned with a customized user 
personality designed for the user’s specific needs by the OpenSky network administrator. 
If this personality contains encrypted talk groups or if the user is authorized for, and intends to use, 
manual encryption, User Login must be performed. This requires a system model control head so that 
the User ID and password can be entered. 
3. When provisioning is complete, the radio will display the Dwell Display. 
If User Login is required, the bottom line of the Dwell Display will flash the message “Pls Login.” 
7.2.2 Volume Control 
Turn the Power On-Off/Volume Control knob clockwise to increase the volume and counter-clockwise to 
decrease the volume. 
7.3 SELF-TEST 
After power-up, the M7300 radio undergoes a multi-function automatic registration procedure. As many 
as sixteen (16) possible radio profiles are downloaded to the radio from the network in response to the 
User’s ID. 
7.4  LOGIN TO THE NETWORK 
Login occurs either automatically (auto registration) if the radio has a valid registration or, if enabled and 
authorized for encryption (Section 7.30), requires the user to enter a User ID and password. 
If encryption is enabled and authorized on the radio, the user will be prompted to “Pls Login” with the *1 
login command, a User ID, and password [System Model Control Head required]. 
1. Press *1 (Login command). 
2. Enter the full 10-digit User ID. 
3. Press the # key. 
4. Enter the password. 
• If the radio is configured for alpha-numeric passwords and the password has consecutive 
duplicate numbers (“MES33” for example), enter # between the consecutive duplicate numbers 
so the radio will not interpret the entry as a letter (“D” in this example). 
• If the radio is configured for numeric-only passwords, do not enter # between duplicated 
numbers. 
5. Press the # key twice. 
The User ID may be remembered from the previous log-in. (Refer to Section 7.5 for further details 
regarding log-off commands.) The password will be established before the radio is put into operation. 
Contact the local OpenSky network administrator for more information. 
If necessary, contact radio system administration personnel for log-in assistance and/or 
radio-specific log-in instructions. 

MM-014716-001 
20 
7.5  LOG OFF THE NETWORK 
The *0## command de-registers the radio. Typically, this is automatically performed when powering 
down the radio. Using this method, the User ID is remembered by the radio so only the password is 
needed at next log-in. Manually log-off by pressing *0## (requires System Model). 
If a user is logged in using encryption features, it is necessary to log-off when encryption is no longer 
required. 
7.6  TURNING THE RADIO OFF 
To turn the radio off, rotate the Power On-Off/Volume Control knob counter-clockwise. In multiple 
control head installations, turning off the last powered-up control head will also automatically turn off the 
radio. 
Several user-selected radio settings (i.e., scan mode, pre-set buttons, and side tone levels) are maintained 
for the next operational session. At the next radio power-up, maintained settings will automatically 
restore, along with the network personality settings. In multiple control head installations, settings are 
maintained for each control head position. 
If power is abruptly disconnected from the radio prior to executing the correct turn-off 
procedure, user-selected radio settings and last-tuned channel information will be lost. 
This can extend the time required for the radio to register with the network upon the 
subsequent power-up. 
7.7  MENU DISPLAY AND CONTROL AREA 
Following power-up, the radio display shows the default talk group (Figure 7-3). Pressing up or down 
with   changes the display to the next available menu. In many cases, the dwell display 
automatically re-appears after no menu buttons are pressed for a short period of time (between 10 and 30 
seconds). For some menus such as the GPS and User ID menus, this does not occur until the user presses 
a front panel button. 
When the dwell display is active, it will change dynamically to reflect the current profile, received talk 
group/caller ID (when available), or channel (when enabled). 
The radio’s display is highly interactive. It responds in the top and bottom text lines as the user presses 
the menu buttons ( ,   and MENU) to scroll through the menu loop and the entries for each 
menu. Table 7-4 outlines the basic menu structure. 
Figure 7-3: Typical Display 

MM-014716-001 
21 
7.8  RADIO STATUS ICONS 
Status Icons indicate the various operating characteristics of the radio. The icons show operating modes 
and conditions (see Table 7-2). The location of icons on the display may vary depending on configuration. 
Table 7-2: Icons and Descriptions 
ICON  DESCRIPTION 
Indicates data registration. 
 Volume bars – indicates relative volume level. 
7.9 DWELL DISPLAY 
When not engaged in menu selection, the first two lines of the display default to the user-defined display, 
known as the “dwell display.” The top line indicates the currently selected talk group. The second line 
will display the currently selected profile, caller ID/alias1, received talk group, and current channel name. 
Press the   ramp control to scroll through and view one of these second line options.  
7.10 PERSONALITY 
As illustrated in Figure 7-4, a personality defines the profiles and talk groups available to the user. It is 
the structuring of a collection of profiles and privileges established by the OpenSky network administrator 
to provide the user with a comprehensive set of profiles to communicate effectively with the necessary 
talk groups or individuals. 
Personalities are stored on the network and downloaded over-the-air to the radio. This process is called 
“provisioning.” Provisioning occurs at radio power-up and at user log-in. Each personality can contain up 
to sixteen (16) profiles and each profile can contain up to sixteen talk groups. 
7.10.1 Profiles 
As stated above, each profile can contain up to sixteen (16) talk groups. A profile also defines the radio’s 
emergency behavior. All transmissions are made on the selected talk group (displayed on the top line of 
the dwell display). The user can change the selected talk group to any of the other talk groups within the 
profile. 
1 Alias is a logical ID name such as “J_Smith.”  The name corresponds to a user ID such as 003-542-0001. 

MM-014716-001 
22 
TG a 
TG b 
TG c 
TG x 
TG y 
TG z 
TG d
TG e
TG f
TG a
TG d
TG g
TG h
TG i
TG = Talk Group 
Profile 1  Profile 2  Profile 3 
Figure 7-4: Personality Structure Example 
If Global Profile is enabled by the system administrator, the number of available talk 
groups to scan doubles. 
7.10.2 Talk Groups 
A talk group represents a set of users that regularly need to communicate with one another. There can be 
any number of authorized users assigned to a talk group. Talk groups are established and organized by the 
OpenSky network administrator. An OpenSky talk group is similar to a channel within a conventional FM 
radio system. 

MM-014716-001 
23 
7.11 ALERT TONES 
The M7300 radio also provides audible Alert Tones or “beeps” to indicate the various operating 
conditions (see Table 7-3). 
Table 7-3: M7300 OpenSky Mode Alert Tones 
NAME  TONE  DESCRIPTION 
Call Queued  one low tone/two high tones  Call queued for processing. 
Call Denied  three short beeps  Radio is out of coverage area or requested talk group is 
active. 
Grant (or Go-Ahead)  single short beep 
Sounded when resources become available for a call 
request placed in the queue (if enabled) upon channel 
access.  
If the radio roams to another site while transmitting, then 
it will auto rekey and begin transmitting on that tower. It 
gives a second grant tone to let the user know they have 
roamed. 
Call Removed  single long low-pitched tone  Notifies the user access to the channel has been lost 
(out of coverage area or pre-empted by higher-priority 
call) 
Selective Alert 
Received  four short tones   Only played once to indicate a selective alert has been 
received.  
Emergency Alert Tone   three long tones   Sounds when an emergency alert is declared  
Emergency Cleared 
Tone  one long low-pitched tone  Sounds when an emergency is cleared 
Selective Call Ring 
Tone  a ringing tone similar to a 
telephone 
Ringing is repeated every four seconds until the call is 
accepted or rejected by the radio being called or until the 
network drops the call if unanswered after one minute 
PSTN Ring Tones  a single medium-pitch 
repeating tone 
Two ring tone - one generated by the radio when there is 
an incoming telephone call or an outgoing telephone call 
attempt is waiting for the telephone interconnect gateway 
equipment to dial the Public Switched Telephone 
Network (PSTN). The second ring tone sounds when the 
gateway equipment has dialed the number. 
Roam Tone  Two short tones, one high-
pitched and one low-
pitched 
Sounds when the radio transitions from one radio base 
station site to another. 
Out of Range Tone  three brief tones   If enabled via programming, sounds at a programmable 
interval while the radio is in a state of persistent 
deactivation.  
7.12  BASIC MENU STRUCTURE 
Table 7-4 illustrates the basic M7300 OpenSky menu structure. Menu items will vary depending upon 
system programming, radio hardware, and optional configurations. All menus except the dwell display 
menu can be turned off by network administration personnel. 

MM-014716-001 
24 
Table 7-4: Basic Menu Structure 
Menu Name  Radio Displays 
(top and bottom lines)  Usage Notes 
 To/From Dwell Display  
registration, RF sync and 
transceiver status codes 
Engineering Display 
(Menu may not be 
available per 
programming.) bit-error rates 
and RSSI data 
Displays radio system connection data. For engineering use.  
OFF/ON 
Silent Emergency  “SilentEmerg”  Use   to toggle Silent Emergency OFF/ON. 
available modes 
Operating Mode 
(e.g., OTP, EDACS, etc.) “Mode Menu”  Use   to choose an available mode. Press MENU and 
confirm (Y/N) with   and press MENU again. 
current latitude and 
longitude 
GPS Fix  “GPS Fix” 
Radio’s current GPS latitude and longitude position scrolls 
across top line of the display. Applies to GPS-equipped radios 
only.  
User ID # of user 
currently logged in 
User ID  “User ID” 
User’s identification/name scrolls across top line of the display 
(if programmed). 
Radio’s IP address 
IP Address  “IP Address”  Radio’s Internet Protocol (IP) address scrolls across top line of 
the display. 
station’s call sign 
Station Identification  “Station ID”  Station’s identification/name scrolls across top line of the display 
(if programmed). 
“OFF” 
Stealth Mode  “StealthMenu”  Use   to enable. Press any button to disable.  
“LOW”, “MEDIUM”, 
“MEDHIGH”, “HIGH” 
Treble Level  “Treble Menu” 
Use  to choose speaker/headset treble level. Press 
Select to return to dwell display.  
“<< >>” 
Display Brightness  “Bright Menu”  Use   to dim or brighten. Press MENU to return to dwell 
display. 
“OFF”, “LOW”, “MED”, 
“HIGH” 
Side Tone Level  “Side Menu” 
Use   to choose side tone level. Press MENU to return to 
dwell display.  
“ON” or “OFF” 
Intercom  “INTERCOM”  Use   to turn intercom on and off. Press MENU to return to 
dwell display.  
selected channel Selected Channel 
(Menu may not be 
available per radio 
programming) “ChannelMenu”  Displays the current channel. Press MENU to return to dwell 
display. 
 See Next Page   

MM-014716-001 
25 
Menu Name  Radio Displays 
(top and bottom lines)  Usage Notes 
 See Previous Page   
current scan mode 
Scan Mode  “ScnModeMenu”  Use   to turn scan on and off. Press MENU to return to 
dwell display.  
talk group “<” 
Talk group 
Lock Out   “LockOutMenu”  Use   to choose a talk group for locking/unlocking. Press 
MENU to toggle “<” on (locked out) and off.  
current priority talk group
Priority 1 
Talk group  “Priority2”  Use   to choose new priority talk group. Press MENU to 
return to dwell display.  
current priority talk group
Priority 2 
Talk group  “Priority1”  Use   to choose new priority talk group. Press MENU to 
return to dwell display.  
alert received 
Emergency Dismiss  “EmgDismiss”  Use   to choose emergency talk group. Press MENU to 
dismiss.  
time/sender’s name/ 
alias/message text 
Alerts Received  “AlertsRcvd” 
or oldest message 
“No alerts” or alert message text scrolls in display. Use 
to view messages.  
current speed dial # 
Alert Destination  “AlertDest” 
Use   to choose a speed-dial number. Press MENU to go 
to “AlertMsg” menu. Scroll through canned messages with 
.  Press  MENU to send message and return to dwell 
display.  
current speed dial # 
Speed Dial  “SpeedDial”  Use   to choose a speed-dial number. Press MENU, then 
use   to select canned message. 
currently active profile 
Profile Selection  “ProfileMenu”  Use   to choose an available profile. Press MENU to 
return to dwell display.  
selected talk group 
Talk group 
Selection  “TalkGrpMenu”  Use   to choose a talk group in current profile. Press 
MENU to return to dwell display.  
Selected talk group 
Dwell Display  (bottom line option)  Use   to scroll top line through talk groups. Press MENU
to change bottom line option.  
Use , CLR, or OPT to scroll through menus. 
Menus will vary depending upon system programming, radio hardware, and optional 
configurations.  

MM-014716-001 
26 
7.13 DUAL-TONE MULTI-FREQUENCY 
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) is the system used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a 
specific tone frequency to each key so a microprocessor can easily identify its activation. The radio 
supports DTMF with a system model control head (Figure 7-1). This allows for specific tasks such as 
entering a user ID and password, or selective calling. 
When a key on the DTMF keypad is pressed, the DTMF tone is played through the radio’s speaker. 
7.14  KEYPAD COMMANDS (SYSTEM MODEL CONTROL HEAD) 
To perform a command from the keypad, press the * key followed by one of the pre-set function keys as 
follows: 
Table 7-5: Keypad Function Commands 
*0  Log-off command:  *0## (logs the user off the system). See page 20 for additional information. 
*1  Log-in command:  *1<User ID> # <Password> ## (required for encryption). See page 19 for 
additional information. 
*4  Enter Scene of Incident Mode (SOI) on specified channel and band:  
*4#<channel>#<Band>#  
*4#  Exit SOI Mode. 
*6  Go to default profile: Selects default profile if the radio is not voice registered. 
*7  Initiate Selective Alert command:  *7<Target ID>#[Choose Message]#. See page 35 for 
additional information. 
*8  Radio-to-Radio Call command: Selective call number # (PTT to dial).  
*9  Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) Call command: See page 36 for additional 
information. 
*32  Begin Manual Encryption command:  *32<Pre-Determined Encryption Key >#  
1 – 16 digit encryption key for 128 bit encryption; 17 – 32 digit encryption key for 256 bit 
encryption. See page 40 for additional information. 
*33  End Manual Encryption command. 
7.14.1 Password Entry 
Password entry requires a system model control head. Password characters are encrypted on the display 
using symbols to indicate the entry. The encryption symbols for each entry will appear in the display as 
they are scrolled through, for example: '-' and '+'. Press the # key twice to complete the entry process.  
If the password is wrong, the radio will not successfully register with the network for 
wide area voice reception. The radio can still be used in single-site mode. 

MM-014716-001 
27 
7.14.2 DTMF Overdial 
Using the keypad on a System Model, the radio can transmit DTMF tones corresponding to 
numbers/characters 0 — 9, * and # on the keypad. To overdial numbers/characters, transmit by pressing 
and holding the PTT button and then, press the corresponding keys (one at a time) on the keypad. 
7.15  CHANGING THE ACTIVE PROFILE 
The radio can store up to sixteen (16) standard profiles, one of which is the currently active profile. To 
change the currently active profile: 
1. Scroll through the menu with   until “ProfileMenu” is displayed. 
2. Use   to scroll through the list of available profiles. 
3. Profile becomes active when selected for longer than 2 seconds, when the MENU is pressed, or when 
the menu is changed using  .  
7.16  CHECKING OR CHANGING THE SELECTED TALK GROUP 
Each profile stored in the radio can have up to sixteen (16) talk groups. One talk group within the 
currently active profile is set as the “selected talk group.” For the radio user, the selected talk group is 
typically the focus of most voice transmissions and receptions. There are two ways to change the selected 
talk group: 
First Method: 
1. Use   to scroll through the menu until “TalkGrpMenu” appears on the bottom line of the 
display. The currently selected talk group appears in the top line of the display.  
2. Use   to scroll through the available list of talk groups in the active profile. This list is 
determined by the OpenSky network administrator. 
Second Method: 
From the dwell display, use the talk group selection knob or   to scroll through the available list of 
talk groups in the active profile. 
7.17  ADJUSTING DISPLAY AND BUTTON BACKLIGHT BRIGHTNESS 
The radio uses a light sensor on the front panel to automatically adjust display brightness and button 
backlight brightness to ambient light conditions. The display and backlights automatically brighten at 
higher external light levels and automatically dim at lower external light levels. However, the “Bright 
Menu” gives the user some manual brightness control as follows: 
1. Using  , scroll through the menu until “Bright Menu” appears. 
2. Use   to increase or decrease brightness. Display and button backlight brightness will 
immediately dim or brighten. 
7.18 STEALTH MODE 
For some users, it is important to be able to turn off the radio’s display lights, button backlighting, volume 
and side tones, but not the radio traffic. For example, in covert operations, lights and sounds could 
inadvertently expose an otherwise unobservable radio user. For this purpose, the radio has a Stealth 
feature that disables the radio display light, indicator light and audible side tones.  

MM-014716-001 
28 
When stealth mode is on, the radio continues to scan the programmed list of talk groups and the user can 
key-up on the selected talk group. 
7.18.1 Enabling Stealth Mode 
1. Using  , scroll through the menu until “StealthMenu” appears. 
2. To immediately turn stealth mode on, press (+) or (-) with  . 
3. To turn stealth mode off, press any button on the radio’s front panel. 
7.18.2 Disabling Stealth Mode 
Pressing any radio button other than the mic’s PTT button or the emergency button on front panel will 
immediately turn stealth mode off. For example, pressing the MENU button on the front panel will turn 
stealth mode off. 
With stealth mode on, pressing any radio button (other than the mic’s PTT button 
or the emergency button) on front panel will immediately turn stealth mode off. 
7.19  ADJUSTING SIDE TONE AUDIO LEVEL 
The radio sounds confirming tones called “side tones” when its buttons are pressed. Most users find this 
audible confirmation helpful when navigating the menus. Side tone audio level can be adjusted or turned 
completely off using the “Side Menu.” 
For covert operations, it may be necessary to turn off side tones. For safety’s sake, turning off the radio 
during covert operations is not recommended. 
To temporarily disable the side tones that could expose the user’s presence and position, use the menu 
buttons to access the “Side Menu” and select “Off” from the menu choices. 
If the radio is operating properly but side tones are not heard when the menu buttons are pressed, the side 
tones are probably turned off. To turn them back on, access the “Side Tone” menu and select a setting 
other than “off.” 
Use the following procedure set side tone level: 
1. Use   to cycle through the menu until the “Side Menu” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. 
2. Use   to change to the desired level (Off, Low, Medium, and High). To turn side tones 
completely off, use the “Off” setting. 
7.20 CHANGE OPERATING MODE 
4. Use   to cycle through the menu until the “Mode Menu” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. 
5. Use   to choose an available mode. Press MENU and confirm (Y/N) with   and press 
MENU again. 

MM-014716-001 
29 
7.21 RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING VOICE CALLS 
As soon as the radio completes the startup/log-on/provision/self-test sequence and registers on the 
OpenSky network, voice calls from talk groups in the active profile will be audible. 
7.21.1 Receiving a Voice Call 
No action is required to receive a voice call. The display responds to incoming voice calls as follows: 
• When the dwell display is set to received talk group and the scan mode is Normal or Fixed: 
a. If the received talk group matches the selected talk group, then the alias (if available) or user id of 
the incoming caller is displayed.  
b. If the received talk group does not match the selected talk group, then the received talk group 
name is displayed 
• When the dwell display is set to received talk group and the scan mode is None: 
a. If the received talk group matches the selected talk group, then the alias (if available) or the user 
id of the incoming caller is displayed. 
b. If the received talk group does not match the selected talk group, then None is displayed. 
• When the dwell display is not set to received talk group, then there is no display indication of an 
incoming call. 
Refer to Section 7.25 for detailed information on talk group scanning. Refer to Section 7.30 for detailed 
information regarding sending and receiving encrypted calls. 
7.21.2 Transmitting a Voice Call 
Transmit a voice call as follows: 
1. Turn the radio on. 
2. If required, log-in to the network using a user ID and password (see Section 7.4). 
3. Select the desired talk group for transmitting on. 
4. Press and hold the Push-to-Talk (PTT) button on the hand-held microphone, pause for a moment, 
and then speak normally. For maximum clarity, hold the microphone approximately 1 ½ inches from 
the mouth and do not shout or whisper into it. If the call is queued by the network, wait for the grant 
tone to sound before speaking.  
5. Release the PTT button when finished speaking. 
Refer to Section 7.30 for detailed information regarding sending and receiving encrypted calls. 
7.22  ADJUSTING AUDIO TREBLE LEVEL 
The tone of received signals can be adjusted using the radio’s “Treble Menu” as follows: 
1. Use   to scroll through the menu until “Treble Menu” appears. The radio’s current treble level 
setting indicates in the top line of the display. There are four levels available: low, medium, medium-
high and high. 
2. Use   to increase or decrease. 
3. Press the MENU button or wait a few seconds to return to the Dwell Display. 

MM-014716-001 
30 
7.23 INTERCOM MODE 
The optional intercom mode gives users at multiple control heads connected to the same radio the ability 
to communicate with each other without transmitting over-the-air. Turn intercom mode on and off using 
the “INTERCOM” menu as follows: 
1. Use   to cycle through the available menu items until “INTERCOM” appears in the display. 
2. Use   to toggle between “On” and “Off.” 
When intercom mode is turned on: 
• Incoming voice calls will override intercom communications for the duration of the voice call. The 
radio and associated control heads will remain in intercom mode and intercom communications will 
resume when the voice call ends. 
• “TG: INTERCOM” appears in the control head’s display when talking on the intercom. This indicates 
microphone audio is not sent out on the selected talk group; rather, it remains localized between the 
radio control positions (i.e., the control heads connected to the mobile radio). 
• If a call exists on the currently selected talk group when a PTT button is pressed at one of the control 
heads, “TG: in use” appears in the display to indicate intercom mic audio cannot preempt the call on 
the talk group. 
CAUTION  
A user at a radio with only one control head/front panel can turn intercom mode on. In 
this case, pressing the microphone’s PTT button will not send microphone audio 
anywhere. 
7.24  TALK GROUP LOCK OUT 
There are two ways of focusing voice communications by suppressing calls from talk groups in the 
currently active profile: 
1. No Scan. By turning scan off (selecting “No Scan” via the “ScnModeMenu”), only the selected talk 
group is audible. 
2. Lock Out. By locking out selected talk groups, the “chatter” of the locked-out talk groups cannot be 
heard. This focuses the user’s scanning resources to calls only on desired talk groups. 
Talk group lock out is a scan-related feature. With lock out, one or more talk groups in the active profile 
can be temporarily disabled from being scanned. Calls are not received on locked-out talk groups. Lock 
out settings are not retained between profile changes or when the radio is power cycled. 
Lock out is a listening (receive) function and only blocks received calls on locked out 
talk groups. Lock out does not affect transmit capability. The above methods do not 
apply to recent emergency lock outs. 
Only talk groups in the active profile can be locked out, since they are the only talk groups whose voice 
calls can be heard on the radio. 
P1 and P2 talk groups cannot be locked out. 

MM-014716-001 
31 
The default emergency and emergency-capable talk groups can be locked out if they are NOT in an 
emergency state. If a talk group is locked out and is subsequently changed to the currently selected talk 
group, it will automatically be unlocked by the radio so the user can hear calls on the talk group. The 
radio may be configured so all talk groups are automatically locked out by default. In this case, they must 
be manually unlocked, if desired. 
7.24.1 Lock Out a Talk Group 
1. Use   to scroll through the menu until “LockOutMenu” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. The name of a talk group in the currently active profile will appear in the top line. 
2. Use   to scroll through the list of talk groups, if any, until the desired talk group for lock out 
appears in the top line of the display.  
3. Press the MENU button to lockout the displayed talk group. A less than symbol (<) appears next to 
the talk group’s name. 
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as needed, to lockout additional talk groups. 
The dwell display will re-appear a few seconds after button presses end. 
While scrolling through talk groups in the active profile, the only talk groups that appear in the 
“LockOutMenu” are those in the active profile. 
7.24.2 Unlock a Talk Group 
1. Use   to scroll through the menu until “LockOutMenu” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. The name of a talk group in the currently active profile will appear in the top line. 
2. Use   to scroll through the list of talk groups, if any, until the talk group desired for unlocking 
appears in the top line of the display. A less-than symbol (“<”) appears next to the name of a talk 
group that is currently locked out. 
3. Press the MENU button to unlock the talk group. The less-than symbol (“<”) next to the name of the 
talk group disappears. The dwell display appears as soon as the radio acknowledges the selection. 
• Changing the active profile removes any lockouts you have made. 
• Turning off the radio removes any lockouts you have made. 
7.25 SCANNING 
Three scanning modes are available for the radio, but only one can be active at any time. Changing the 
scanning mode changes the way the radio scans voice calls for all of profiles in the radio personality, no 
matter which profile is or becomes active. 
As described in Table 7-6, the choice of scanning mode changes the span of communications with all the 
talk groups in the radio’s profiles, but does not affect interaction with the talk groups. 

MM-014716-001 
32 
Table 7-6: Scan Modes 
SCAN 
MODE  EXPLANATION 
No Scan 
Eliminates distractions. 
Full communications (transmit and receive) on selected talk group. 
No calls received from other talk groups. 
Normal  
(Default) 
The user can scan all talk groups in the active profile that are not locked out as long as 
there is demand on the site. 
Priority (P1 and P2) groups are user selectable. 
Receive calls from more than one talk group, if available from the current site. 
Allows dragging of the selected talk group, P1, P2, and default emergency talk groups to 
the site on which the radio is registered. (If other calls are available at the site, they also 
can be heard but they will not be actively dragged.) 
The default emergency talk group, as well as any emergency-enabled talk groups, is only 
dragged if it is in emergency mode. 
Fixed  Functions the same as Normal Scan Mode except the priority groups are fixed to the 
selected profile’s pre-defined P1 and P2 groups (configured via the UAS). In this mode, 
P1 and P2 groups CANNOT be locked out. 
7.25.1 Checking or Changing Active Scan Mode 
The currently active scan mode does not appear in the dwell display. To check it, access “ScnModeMenu” 
and observe it in the top line of the display. To change the active scan mode: 
1. Use   to scroll through the menus until “ScnModeMenu” appears in the display. 
2. Use   to scroll through the scan options until the desired mode appears. See Table 7-6. 

MM-014716-001 
33 
7.25.2 Scanning Priority 
The following lists the scanning priority order (from highest to lowest): 
1. Selected talk group in emergency state. 
2. Default emergency group in emergency state. 
3. Selected talk group. 
4. Emergency capable group in emergency state 
5. Priority 1 talk group. 
6. Priority 2 talk group. 
7. Other (non-priority) 
7.25.2.1 Changing Scanning Priority 
Follow this procedure to set talk groups in the current profile as the Priority 1 or Priority 2 talk group: 
1. Use   to scroll through the menu until “Priority1” or “Priority2” appears in the bottom line of 
the display (Priority1 group has higher priority than the Priorty2 group. The talk group currently set 
as the priority talk group appears in the top line of the display. 
2. Use   to select a new priority talk group. 
3. Press the MENU button to set the newly selected talk group as the priority talk group. 
7.26  MAKING SELECTIVE CALLS 
Selective calling is a feature that allows two radio units to obtain and utilize an independent voice path for 
a private call. Radios can be configured to both initiate and receive selective calls or to only receive 
selective calls. 
In the OpenSky system, a source radio can be configured to initiate selective calls through a pre-
programmed list in memory. This method uses the “speed dial list” set up by the OpenSky network 
administrator and provisioned as part of the registration process. 
In addition, a properly equipped source radio can initiate a selective call to any radio in the system by 
entering the ten-digit voice user ID (which looks like a telephone number) of the target device. Entering a 
selective call number without using the speed dial feature requires a system model control head (Figure 
7-1). See Section 7.13 for more detail. 
Selective calls are terminated if an emergency is declared. The network limits selective 
calls to ten (10) minutes maximum. 

MM-014716-001 
34 
7.26.1 Manually Dialing a Selective Call (System Model Control Head) 
1. Press *8 on the keypad. 
2. Enter the number of the radio to be called (e.g., 027-001-0006). If the region number (first 3 digits; 
027 in this example) is the same as this radio’s region number, these digits do not need to be entered. 
Likewise, if the region and agency numbers (first 6 digits; 027-001 in this example) are the same as 
this radio’s numbers, these digits do not need to be entered. Leading zeros can also be ignored. 
3. Press and release the # key. 
4. Wait approximately two (2) seconds. 
5. Press and release the PTT button to initiate the selective call request. When the called party accepts 
the call, press the PTT again and begin speaking. 
7.26.2 Speed Dialing a Selective Call 
Speed dial numbers are defined and provisioned by the OpenSky network administrator 
and cannot be manually entered into the radio by the user. Contact the administrator if 
changes to the speed dial list are required. 
1. Scroll through the Menu options using   until “SpeedDial” appears in the bottom line of the 
display. 
2. Using  , scroll through the pre-programmed speed-dial numbers until the desired number 
appears in the display. 
3. Press and release the PTT button to ring the other user. 
a. The ring tone is sounded. 
b. If the other user accepts the call, the called user’s alias will appear in the initiating caller’s 
display. The two are now in a private call until one ends the call, the call is terminated due to an 
initiated emergency, or the maximum time limit of ten (10) minutes is reached. 
4. To end the call, press the # button or (-) using  . 
7.26.3 Receiving a Selective Call 
When someone calls in from another radio using the selective call function, a ring sounds in the speaker 
and/or headset. Press up or down using   or any number key to accept an incoming Selective Call. 
Press the microphone’s PTT button when speaking (transmitting) to the caller. 
Press the # button or (-) using   to reject an incoming Selective Call. 
A selective call will be interrupted if an emergency is declared on a monitored talk group. 
7.26.4 Terminating a Selective Call 
Press the # button or (-) using   to terminate an incoming Selective Call. 

MM-014716-001 
35 
7.27 SELECTIVE ALERT 
Selective alert messaging is an OTP feature allowing one of up to eight (8) pre-programmed text 
messages (refer to Section 7.27.3) to be sent from one radio to another. The user specifies a destination 
radio’s User ID, selects one of the pre-programmed text messages, and then transmits it to the destination 
radio. The message delivery system adds time-of-day information and forwards the message to the 
destination (receiving) radio. The sending radio receives a brief message noting the status of the 
transmission. Refer to Table 7-7 for a list of possible status messages. 
The first few characters of a message are part of the message text entered when the message is 
programmed. This programming is performed by the system or network administration personnel. 
Messages successfully received by the destination radio are stored until deleted or until it is power cycled. 
7.27.1 Sending Selective Alert Messages 
The destination radio’s User ID can be selected via the menu or via the keypad on the system model 
control head. 
Menu Button Method: 
1. Using  , scroll through the menu until “AlertDest” (Alert Destination) appears in the bottom 
line of the display. The current speed dial number scrolls on the top line. 
2. Use   to change to a different speed-dial number.  
3. When the desired speed-dial number appears, press the MENU button to activate the selection. 
4. Choose and send the message. 
Keypad Method (System Model Control Head): 
To select the destination radio’s User ID using the keypad, perform the following: 
1. Press *7 on the keypad. “AlertDest” appears in the display. 
2. Enter the number of the destination radio (e.g., 027-001-0006) using the DTMF keypad. If the region 
number (first 3 digits; 027 in this example) is the same as this radio’s region number, these digits do 
not need to be entered. Likewise, if the region and agency numbers (first 6 digits; 027-001 in this 
example) are the same as this radio’s numbers, these digits do not need to be entered. Leading zeros 
can also be ignored. Refer to Section 7.13. 
3. Press the # key to enter the number. 
Choosing and Sending the Message 
After specifying the destination radio’s User ID (Section 7.27.1), the radio automatically allows you to 
choose a message. The current message scrolls across the top line of the display. To choose a message: 
1. Scroll through the message list using  . The next available message in the list is displayed. 
Pause between each arrow button press to observe the entire message as it scrolls across the top line 
of the display. 
2. To select and send the displayed message, press the Select button, or press the # button on the 
keypad. 
3. The status of the sent message will be momentarily displayed (Table 7-7). 

MM-014716-001 
36 
Table 7-7: Status of Selective Alert 
STATUS MESSAGE  DEFINITION 
Delivering  Select Alert message transmit attempt 
Busy  Too busy – Try again 
Dest Down  Receiving radio not logged on – Not registered 
Not Reg  Transmitting radio not logged on – Not registered 
Delivered Transmission complete 
Unreachable No response 
Partial Transmission interrupted 
7.27.2 Receiving Messages 
When a selective alert message is received by a radio, a four-beep tone (one low, two high, and one low) 
is heard and “NewAlert” flashes until the new message is read. Up to eight (8) received messages are 
stored. If another message is received, the first (oldest) message is automatically deleted to make room for 
new incoming messages. 
Displaying Received Messages 
1. Using  , scroll through the menu until “AlertsRecvd” (Alerts Received) appears in the bottom 
line of the display. “No alerts” or the last received (newest) message appears in the display. It is 
preceded by the time the message was received, and the sender’s name/alias. 
2. View other received messages using  . 
3. To delete the message currently being viewed, press the MENU button. 
Deleting Received Messages 
To delete a received message: 
1. Display the message. 
2. Delete the message by pressing the MENU button. 
3. Confirm the deletion by pressing the MENU button again. 
7.27.3 Defining Pre-Programmed Messages 
All selective alert messages are pre-defined by the radio system’s maintenance personnel. These messages 
are sometimes referred to as “canned” messages. Custom selective alert messages cannot be created by 
the radio user. The entire selective alert message, including the abbreviation, can include up to 99 text 
characters. 
7.28 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS (SYSTEM MODEL CONTROL 
HEAD) 
7.28.1 Placing an Interconnect Call 
If the radio system is equipped with Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) interconnect 
equipment, telephone calls can be made from the M7300 using this procedure: 

MM-014716-001 
37 
1. Press the *9 keys. 
2. Enter the telephone number. Ignore dashes/spaces, and precede the number with any required access 
digits such as a 1 for long distance. 
3. Press the # key. 
4. Wait a few seconds and then press and release the mic’s PTT button to initiate the call. An initial ring 
tone plays indicating call initiation. Once the gateway picks up the call, another ring tone sounds. 
5. When the caller answers, press the PTT button when speaking and release it to listen to the caller. 
6. To hang-up, press the # button or (-) using  . 
7.28.2 Receiving an Interconnect Call 
When receiving an Interconnect Call, a ring sounds in the speaker and/or headset. Press up or down using 
 or any number key to accept an incoming Interconnect Call. Press the microphone’s PTT button 
when speaking (transmitting) to the caller. 
Press the # button or (-) using   to reject an incoming Interconnect Call. 
7.29 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS 
The M7300 mobile radio can transmit both emergency voice calls and emergency alerts over the entire 
network. OpenSky handles emergency calls and alerts with the highest priority. 
For critical voice communications, an emergency call can be raised on the default talk group or the 
currently selected talk group by “declaring” an emergency on the talk group. The exact talk group is 
determined by the currently active profile. After successfully declaring an emergency on a talk group, the 
declaring radio’s microphone remains “hot” for a predetermined amount of time. In other words, the radio 
transmits audio for a period of time even when the microphone’s PTT button is not pressed. An 
emergency talk group is provided greater priority and infinite hang-time by the radio system’s 
infrastructure. Hang-time is the maximum duration of quiet time between transmissions on the talk group 
before the infrastructure assets are automatically taken away. Because an emergency call is handled on a 
talk group, it is received by all radios and consoles monitoring the talk group. 
An emergency alert is a data message sent by the radio to the MIS console (or any console capable of 
receiving it). It identifies the radio declaring the emergency, and the radio’s location (if the radio is 
equipped with a GPS receiver). Voice audio is not automatically transmitted during the emergency if the 
administrator configures the radio for alert notification only. 
7.29.1 Declaring an Emergency Call or Alert 
To declare an emergency call or emergency alert, press and release the orange Emergency button. This 
button is located just to the right of the 5-button Menu and Select keypad; see Figure 7-1 on page 17. The 
emergency is raised after the Emergency Raise Delay (default is one second). 
• The OpenSky network administrator determines if the Emergency button is used to declare an 
emergency call or if it is used to declare an emergency alert. This is based upon the radio’s currently 
active profile. 
• The OpenSky network administrator also determines if the emergency is declared on the currently 
selected talk group or a “default” emergency talk group. Again, this is based upon the radio’s 
currently active profile. A talk group upon which an emergency is declared on is considered an 
“emergency talk group.” 

MM-014716-001 
38 
• Upon successful emergency declaration: 
¾ An emergency tone will sound in the radio’s speaker/headset if the radio is not in stealth mode. 
¾ At the declaring radio, the Emergency button flashes red if the radio is not in stealth mode. The 
administrator can configure the radio to automatically transmit upon successful emergency 
declaration, at which point the MENU button will flash red. However, the MENU button flashing 
red is not a requirement for successful emergency declaration. 
¾ On the declaring radio during an emergency call declaration, the talk group that the emergency is 
declared on is temporarily displayed and then the word “EMERGENCY” flashes on the second 
line of the display.  
¾ For an emergency alert declaration, “EMERG ALERT” appears in the bottom line of the display. 
¾ For an emergency call declaration, other radio users and/or dispatchers at consoles will hear the 
emergency signal, a distinctive 3-tone burst. They will also hear audio from the declaring radio’s 
“hot” microphone, if any. 
¾ For an emergency alert declaration, only dispatchers at consoles will hear the emergency signal 
and, if any, audio from the declaring radio’s “hot” microphone. 
¾ For an emergency call, the declaring radio’s microphone remains “hot” for a predetermined 
amount of time. In other words, the radio transmits audio for a period of time even when the 
microphone’s PTT button is not pressed. Audio is transmitted over the emergency talk group. 
When the microphone is “hot” for this initial period (typically ten seconds), simply speak into it 
for voice transmission. 
If an emergency declaration is not successful, the radio will periodically re-attempt until it is successful. 
During this retry period, the radio will flash “EMERG PEND” on the bottom line of the display. It will 
display “EMERG RETRY” for each attempt. 
7.29.2 Silent Emergency 
When this feature is enabled and an emergency call or alert is declared by pressing the emergency button, 
the radio will not play a tone and will display an abbreviated emergency message (default is EBA). This 
feature is enabled or disabled via programming or via the menu. 
If the Silent Emergency feature is enabled or disabled via programming, the setting will 
survive power cycle. Enable/Disable selection via the menu will NOT survive power cycle 
and the enable/disable state will revert to the programmed setting at power up. 
7.29.3 Clearing an Emergency Call or Alert 
Check with the system administrator to ensure that the radio is programmed to allow an 
emergency to be cleared. 
If enabled via programming, clear an emergency by: 
1. Pressing and holding the CLR/CLEAR button and simultaneously pressing the emergency button. 
2. After the Emergency Cleared Tone sounds, release both buttons. 

MM-014716-001 
39 
If the radio is in stealth mode, clearing the emergency will take the radio out of stealth 
mode. 
7.29.4 Receiving an Emergency Call 
Upon receiving an emergency call declared by another radio: 
• An emergency tone sounds in the radio’s speaker/headset (three short high-pitched beeps). 
• “EMERGENCY” flashes in the display if the radio is not in stealth mode. 
• On receiving radios with the emergency talk group selected, the alias of the sending party is displayed 
for 5 seconds during the open-mic period, then the word “Emergency” flashes on the second line of 
the display and continues until the emergency state ends. 
• If scan mode is set to “No Scan” and the emergency was declared on the selected talk group, audio on 
the emergency talk group is heard in the speaker/headset. See page 31 for additional information on 
“No Scan” operation.  
• If scan mode is set to “No Scan” and the emergency was declared on a talk group other than the 
selected talk group, the emergency talk group (identified by an “*”) must be selected before audio on 
it is heard in the speaker/headset. 
• If scan mode is set to “Normal” and the emergency was declared on the selected talk group, the 
selected/emergency talk group’s name remains in the top line of the display. Audio on the emergency 
talk group is heard in the speaker/headset. 
• If scan mode is set to “Normal” and the emergency was declared on a talk group other than the 
selected talk group, the emergency talk group’s name appears in the bottom line of the display. Audio 
on the emergency talk group is heard in the speaker/headset. 
• The declaring radio's alias appears in the bottom line of the display when the emergency talk group is 
selected. 
• An emergency call can be dismissed as described in the following section. 
A radio declaring an emergency on a talk group has a “hot” mic time period of typically 
ten (10) seconds just after it declares the emergency. This time period may be adjusted 
by system or network administration personnel on a per radio basis. 
7.29.5 Dismissing an Emergency Call 
An emergency is dismissed for a configurable amount of time only (default = 5 minutes). 
To ignore an emergency call declared by another radio user: 
1. Press   until “EmgDismiss” appears in the display. 
2. Press   until the talk group in the emergency state appears, as indicated by an asterisk (*) 
following the talk group’s name. 
3. Press the MENU button. 

MM-014716-001 
40 
The emergency dismiss timer is cleared when the emergency is cleared. 
7.30 ENCRYPTION 
In the OpenSky network, both data and voice use a 128-bit or 256-bit key encryption standard published 
by the Federal Information Processing Service (FIPS), called Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). AES 
is approved by the U.S. Department of Commerce for encryption of classified materials. 
When encryption is enabled on the network, data is encrypted from the MDIS to the Mobile End System 
(MES) (e.g., M7300 mobile radio). This form of encryption provides air-link security. 
Voice encryption is handled either automatically or manually. Automatic encryption is initiated through 
the Unified Administration Server (UAS) for a specific talk group and requires nothing from the user. 
Manual encryption is initiated by two or more radio users and requires system model control heads. Both 
methods of encryption are discussed in the following sections. 
7.30.1 Automatic Encryption 
For automatic encryption, a network administrator will select the talk group to be encrypted at the 
interface to the UAS. Once the talk groups have been selected and identified as secure, credentials for key 
generation are generated automatically by the system and provisioned to authorized users. This process 
requires that authorized users login to the network and be authenticated. Encryption keys require no 
manual handling and are never sent “in the clear” over any network interface or air-link. 
1. “Pls Login” appears displayed in the bottom line of the dwell display. 
2. Login normally using the keypad on a system model control head to enter User ID and Password. 
If a user is engaged in a call on a talk group encrypted at the network administrator level, “Secure Call” 
will appear in the bottom line of the dwell display if the user is logged in to that talk group. 
If a secure call is in progress elsewhere and the user has not logged in, the bottom of the dwell display 
will alternate between “No Access” and the alias of the radio that is currently engaged in the secure call. 
7.30.2 Manual Encryption (System Model) 
Two or more users can manually encrypt a call, if enabled, without an established encrypted talk group. A 
pre-determined key is required at each radio. 
The key must be pre-determined by the users prior to making a manually encrypted call 
on a talk group and is entered into the radio using the keypad. For 128 bit encryption, this 
key is between 1 and 16 digits. For 256 bit encryption, this key is between 17 and 32 
digits. 
If two communicating radios have different (manually-defined) keys, receive audio at 
each radio will sound garbled. 
With manual encryption enabled, unencrypted radio users on the talk group can still make standard voice 
(unencrypted) calls on the talk group. However, if an unencrypted user attempts to transmit on the talk 
group when one of the encrypted users is already transmitting on the talk group, the unencrypted radio 
will sound a deny tone and “No Access” will appear in the display. Also, the encrypted user can hear 
standard unencrypted calls, but cannot respond while still manually encrypted. 

MM-014716-001 
41 
CAUTION  
Do not set a talk group for manual encryption if it has been set for encryption by the 
network administration personnel. 
Perform the following to transmit or receive manually encrypted calls: 
1. Press *32 on the keypad. 
2. Enter the key (1 – 16 digits for 128 bit encryption; 17 – 32 digits for 256 bit encryption). 
3. Press the # key. 
4. To end manual encryption, press *33#. 
If a user is engaged in a call on a talk group that has been manually encrypted at the radio level, the user 
will see “Secure Call” on the bottom of the dwell display. 
If a secure (encrypted) call is in progress, and the user has not entered the key, the bottom of the dwell 
display will alternate between “No Access” and the alias of the radio that is currently engaged in the 
secure call. 
Once the user has terminated manual encryption, “UnSecure” appears temporarily in the bottom line of 
the dwell display. 
7.31 PRESET BUTTONS 
The front panel contains three buttons labeled A, B, and C. By holding one of these buttons down for 
approximately three (3) seconds, the following current information is saved to the function of that button: 
• Selected talk group 
• Selected profile 
• Selected priority talk group 
• Lockouts 
• Scan mode 
• Intercom mode 
Presets are saved and restored to/from non-volatile memory. Changing the User ID (login in as a different 
user) will clear the presets since they are stored on a per-user basis. Changing control heads will not recall 
presets for the previous control head. 
Preset button C can be configured via programming to reboot the radio into a particular 
application mode. Contact your system administrator to determine if this feature is 
enabled in your radio. 
7.32 DYNAMIC REGROUPING  
Dynamic regrouping requires that the network administrator determine which radio users should be 
formed into an impromptu talk group to respond to particular emergency conditions. 
The administrator will edit the personalities of the affected radios to include an emergency profile and 
then page the affected radios to re-register with the network to receive their edited personalities. 

MM-014716-001 
42 
In response, affected radios automatically re-register to receive their edited personalities. During re-
registration, subscriber equipment will default to the emergency profile selected by the administrator. 
7.33 GPS COORDINATES 
The radio’s current latitude and longitude coordinates may be displayed using the “GPS” menu. The 
following procedure assumes a GPS antenna is connected to the radio and it is receiving adequate signals 
from GPS satellites: 
1. Press   until the “GPS” menu appears in the bottom line of the display. Current GPS coordinate 
latitude and longitude data continuously scrolls in the top line of the display in a 
degrees:minutes:seconds format. 
2. Use   to change to another menu. 
If the internal GPS receiver’s data is expired (30 minutes or more) or unavailable, the 
radio uses the serving base station’s coordinates [GPS (Site) is displayed]. The GPS Menu 
will also indicate if the data is aged (2 minutes or more) [GPS (Aged) is displayed] 

MM-014716-001 
43 
8  P25/EDACS/CONVENTIONAL COMMON OPERATION 
8.1  CH721 FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS 
The front panel of the control head includes a dot matrix display, controls for menu navigation, an 
emergency button, three pre-set buttons, a Power On-Off/Volume Control knob, and a microphone 
connector. In addition, the system model control head features a DTMF keypad.  
Table 8-1 lists all default front panel controls and their functions. All functions and controls of the Scan 
radio operate the same as the corresponding functions and controls on the System radio.   
Figure 8-1: System Model 
Figure 8-2: Scan Model 
Button function may vary depending upon system programming, radio hardware, and 
optional configurations. Complete the table in Section 14 if the keys have been 
remapped to provide new functions.  

MM-014716-001 
44 
Table 8-1: Front Panel Default Controls and Functions 
PART  FUNCTION 
Power On-
Off/Volume 
Control knob 
Turn knob clockwise to power on the radio and increase volume. 
Turn counter-clockwise to decrease volume and power off the radio. 
Mic Connection Connection for hand-held, hands-free, speaker-mic, or headset. 
 The Emergency button declares an emergency if enabled through programming. 
Ambient Light 
Sensor  Radio automatically adjusts the display and button backlight brightness level based 
on ambient light. Do not block this sensor. 
 This rotary switch selects the systems or groups/channels, depending upon 
programming. 
This rocker type button is used to display the current SCAN status for a 
group/channel and then add or delete the group/channel from the system scan list.  
Pressing the add/delete button twice while the radio is actively receiving or three 
times when the radio is not receiving selects the last scanned channel (Last 
Scanned Channel Recall). 
The primary function of this rocker type button is to scroll through the System list or 
the Group/Channel list depending upon programming.   
The secondary function is to increment or decrement items within a list (phone list 
for example). 
OPT/OPTION Toggle a PC programmable feature ON and OFF. 
CLR/CLEAR 
In Trunked mode, the CLR button exits the current operation and removes all 
displays associated with it. The radio and display then return to the group receive 
state.  
In Conventional mode, pressing this button unmutes the receiver so activity on the 
selected channel can be monitored. When pressed and held for approximately 3 
seconds, this button toggles conventional channel decoding (Channel Guard, 
Digital Channel Guard, T99) ON and OFF if programmed for the selected channel. 
MENU 
Primary function - access the menu list. This is a list of additional features that are 
not available directly from the keypad. 
Secondary function - activate a selected item within a list, similar to an enter key. 
SCAN 
Primary function - toggle scan operation on and OFF. 
Secondary function - toggle the keypad buttons between their primary function and 
their secondary function. 
Pre-Set buttons 
(A, B, & C)  Used to store and recall user-selectable parameters.  
SYS  Used to enter the System select mode. 
GRP  Used to enter the Group select mode. 
STS  Permits the transmission of a pre-programmed status message to an EDACS site. 
MSG  Permits the transmission of a pre-programmed message to an EDACS site. 
PHN  Used to place telephone calls through the radio by selecting the interconnect 
special call function. 

MM-014716-001 
45 
PART  FUNCTION 
DIS  Used to adjust the current display intensity and the keypad backlight level. 
IND  Used to call an individual or make an all-call by selecting the individual call function. 
8.1.1  Primary Functions (Quick Access) 
The secondary function of the SCAN button is to toggle the keypad buttons between their primary 
function and their secondary function. When the secondary keypad is active, i.e. entering phone digits for 
an interconnect call, the SCAN button can be used to toggle the keypad buttons back to their primary 
function, perform a task, and then toggle back to finish entering the digits for the phone number. 
PRIMARY is displayed when the SCAN button is used to toggle the keypad keys back to their primary 
functions. This provides quick access to the primary functions of the keypad. This is a programmable 
feature of the SCAN button only. Careful consideration should be given to possible operational conflicts 
before enabling this feature. 
Several keys on the Scan version have a secondary function. The MENU key is the SELECT secondary 
function with the CLEAR key remaining the same for the secondary function. On the System version, the 
OPT has a secondary function of DELETE, MENU is SELECT, and CLR retains its CLEAR 
functionality. 
8.2  TURNING THE RADIO ON 
Rotate the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob clockwise, out of detent to turn the radio on. A short 
beep (if enabled through programming) indicates the radio is ready for operation. The display indicates, if 
programmed, the last selected system name on line 1 and the last selected group or channel name on line 
2. 
8.3  SELECTION MODE RULES 
Many operations require selection from a list such as system, group or phone number. This selection 
process is handled in the same manner for all lists. The   ramp control, MENU, 0-9, *, #, and the 
CLR button are used during the selection process. The following example systems list is used to explain 
the process: 
The hookswitch functions the same as the CLR key in I-Call, phone call, and menu 
modes. 
SYSTEM 
1 NORTH
2 SOUTH
3 EAST 
4 WEST 
After entering a selection mode, the following generic display format will appear:  
X X X X X X X X 
Y Y Y    =  Z Z Z 

MM-014716-001 
46 
Line 1 shows the currently selected item name (XXXXXXXX) from the list. Line 2 indicates the list 
(YYY) that the selection is to be made from and the number of the selected item (ZZZ) within the list. (In 
some cases the information on lines 1 and 2 will be exchanged.) Enter the system selection mode by 
pressing the SYS key. If SYSTEM 2 is the current selection, the display appears as follows: 
S O U T H 
S Y S    =      2 
Line 1 contains the current system name, SOUTH; and line 2, SYS = 2, indicates that selection is from 
the system list and it is the second system within the list. 
A new system from the list is selected by using the   ramp control or by directly entering the system 
number with the numeric keys. The   ramp control scrolls through the list in increasing and 
decreasing order. In the previous example, pressing up with the   ramp control selects the EAST 
system as shown in the next display.  
E A S T 
S Y S    =      3 
The radio can be programmed to wrap around from one end of a list to the other end or to stop at the ends. 
8.4 DIRECT ACCESS 
To directly access a selection, enter the corresponding number (e.g. 4) followed by MENU to activate the 
selection. The entered number is displayed on line 2 as shown below. Line 1 shows the current list being 
used for selection. 
S E L   S Y S 
4 
If a mistake is made while entering the number, press the DEL button to backspace once and correct the 
entry. If an invalid number is entered, a short low-pitched tone sounds when MENU is pressed. 
To exit the selection mode, press the CLR button or wait for the time-out. If the selection mode is cleared 
while an entry is pending (i.e., numbers are entered on line 2, but MENU has not been pressed), the entry 
on line 2 will be disregarded and the previous selection will remain active. If the time-out activates while 
an entry is pending, the entry on line 2 will be selected if it is within the valid range; if it is out of range, 
the entry on line 2 will be disregarded and the previous selection will remain active. 
While in system, group or channel selection mode, the radio continues to receive calls 
normally and continues scanning, if it is enabled. If a call is received during the 
selection mode process the radio will return to the normal receive mode display. 
Continuing with the selection process will return the display to the same point in the 
selection process if the selection mode time out has not yet expired. Any press of the 
PTT button during the selection mode process will initiate transmission and exit the 
selection mode. 
8.5  FEATURE ENCRYPTION DISPLAY 
Feature Encryption Display is available through the menu function and, if programmed, appears in the 
menu as “FEATURES.” This data indicates current features programmed into the radio as well as 
information required to add features to the radio.  

MM-014716-001 
47 
Once the feature has been accessed, all normal menu functions work. The user can scroll up or down 
through all of the entries. 
Feature Encryption Display provides the ability to view, in the order displayed, the following: 
• Serial number ROM data - serial number of the ROM 
• Feature encryption data stream - used to enable features 
• Number Fields - defines limits 
• Features enabled - displays bit fields of enabled features 
8.5.1 Serial Number ROM (12 Hex Digits) 
Example: 
When the user wants to enable a feature in his radio, he will need to call M/A-COM, Inc. They will ask 
for the ROM serial number. The serial number shown here is for example only. 
8.5.2  Feature Encryption Data Stream 
Example: 
These data streams define the features the user has enabled in his radio and are required by M/A-COM, 
Inc. to enable other features. The data streams shown here are for example only. Note: There are three 
displays: FD1, FD2, and FD3. All three are required. 
Number Fields 
Example: 

MM-014716-001 
48 
These number fields show the set limits of the of the user's radio as: 
• SG# XXX - Maximum number of system/groups combination available 
• SY# XXX - Maximum trunked system limit 
• CH# XXX - Maximum number of conventional channels available 
The user needs to know the limits of his radio before attempting to enable other features. The numbers 
shown here are for example only. 
8.5.3 Features Enabled 
These numbers indicate which features are enabled. 
Example: 
Table 8-2 lists possible features available in the user's radio. 
Table 8-2: Available Feature Numbers 
FEATURE 
NUMBER  POSSIBLE FEATURES  STANDARD OR 
OPTIONAL 
01  Conventional Priority Scan  Standard 
04  Group Scan (EDACS and P25 Trunked)  Standard 
05  Priority System Scan (EDACS only) Optional 
06  WAscan/ProSound™/ProScan (EDACS only)  Optional 
07 Dynamic Regroup  Standard 
08 EDACS Emergency  Standard 
09 Type 99 Encode  Standard 
10 Conventional Emergency  Standard 
12  Aegis™ Digital Voice Encryption  Optional 
14 DES Encryption  Optional 
16  Mobile Data   Optional 
17  Status/Message (EDACS only)  Optional 
21  EDACS Security Key (ESK)  Optional 
22  ProFile™ (EDACS only)  Optional 
23 Narrowband  Standard 
29 ProVoice™  Optional 
32 FIPS-140-2  Optional 

MM-014716-001 
49 
FEATURE 
NUMBER  POSSIBLE FEATURES  STANDARD OR 
OPTIONAL 
33  P25 Common Air Interface  Optional 
34  Direct Frequency Entry  Optional 
38 Radio TextLink  Optional 
8.6 SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL SELECTION 
In the following description of SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL SELECTION, the term group is used 
for both group and channel. 
The M7300 SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob and the   ramp control are programmable for 
maximum flexibility. If the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob is assigned to select groups, then the 
 ramp control is assigned to select systems. If the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob is assigned 
to select systems, then the   ramp control is assigned to select groups. System, group, and channel 
selection is the primary function for these controls. 
Either systems or groups can also be selected by entering the select mode and following the selection 
mode rules described earlier. The system select or group select modes are entered by pressing SYS or 
GRP, respectively, from the standard receive mode. Using the   ramp control after entering a 
particular selection mode in this manner is the secondary function of these keys. 
8.6.1 System Selection 
Several methods, some of which depend on programming, can be used to select a new system. These 
procedures are presumed to be starting from the normal receive display.  
METHOD 1: If system selection is programmed to the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob, select a 
system by turning the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob to the desired system 
position. The display registers the new system name on line 1. If the wrap option is OFF 
and the knob is moved to a position greater than the number of programmed systems, the 
highest programmed system will remain selected.  
METHOD 2: If system selection is programmed as the primary function of the   ramp control, 
select a system by pressing up or down to scroll through the system list. The display 
registers the new system name on line 1.  
METHOD 3: Press SYS to enter the system select mode and follow the selection mode rules detailed 
earlier. Use the   ramp control to scroll through the systems.  
8.6.2  Group and Channel Selection 
Several methods, some of which depend on programming, can be used to select a new group or channel. 
These procedures assume starting from the normal receive display. 
METHOD 1: If group selection is programmed to the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob, select a 
group by turning the SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL knob to the desired group. The 
display registers the new group name on line 2. If the wrap option is OFF and the knob 
is moved to a position greater than the number of programmed groups, the highest 
programmed group will remain selected.  

MM-014716-001 
50 
METHOD 2: If group selection is programmed as the primary function of the   ramp control, 
select a group by pressing up or down, to scroll through the group list. The display 
registers the new group name on line 2. 
METHOD 3: Press GRP to enter the group select mode and follow the selection mode rules detailed 
earlier. Use the   ramp control to scroll through different groups.  
8.7  LAST SYSTEM/GROUP/CHANNEL RECALL  
This feature, enabled through programming, allows the user to recall the last selected system/group after 
an emergency or home function or system/group key function. For example, if the Home button (pre-
programmed) is pressed, the radio will go to the designated Home system/group or channel. If the Home 
button is pressed again, the radio returns to the previous system/group or channel. At this time, the user 
can toggle between the Home system/group or channel and the previous system/group or channel. The 
operation is the same for the SG1-SG5 buttons. 
8.8  DIGITAL VOICE OPERATION (PROVOICE) 
8.8.1 Voice Modes 
Each system (trunked or conventional) in the radio is programmed for no digital voice operation (analog 
only) or digital voice format ProVoice. ProVoice programmed systems have three (3) different voice 
modes: clear (analog), digital, and private. The voice modes are programmed on a per-group basis within 
each trunked system and on a per-channel basis within each conventional system. A radio must be 
equipped with the encrypt/decrypt option before it will operate in private mode. 
Current ProVoice Conventional operation is for talk-around mode only. 
Table 8-3:  Transmit/Receive Mode Compatibility for ProVoice Operation 
GROUP/CHANNEL 
PROGRAMMING 
(TRANSMIT) 
CLEAR 
RECEIVE  DIGITAL 
RECEIVE  PRIVATE 
RECEIVE 
CLEAR Yes No No 
DIGITAL Yes Yes No 
PRIVATE Yes No Yes 
8.8.2 Clear Modes 
In Clear Mode, the radio transmits and receives only clear (analog) voice signals. These analog signals are 
non-digitized and non-encrypted. Clear Mode transmissions can easily be monitored by unauthorized 
persons. Groups or channels programmed for clear operation cannot transmit or receive unencrypted 
digital or private messages. 

MM-014716-001 
51 
8.8.3 ProVoice Digital Mode 
ProVoice digital mode allows the radio to transmit and receive digitized voice signals. These digital 
signals provide improved weak signal performance and they cannot be easily monitored with a standard 
receiver. Groups and channels programmed for ProVoice digital operation transmit only digital signals. 
Private calls cannot be received or transmitted when the radio is in ProVoice digital mode because the 
radio does not know the cryptographic key used. 
Message trunked group calls and individual calls will be answered back in the mode they were received, 
assuming the call or hang time is still active. Individual, phone, all and emergency calls will be 
transmitted clear if digital mode is disabled or inoperative. 
• If receiving an analog message trunked call, the radio will respond in analog mode during the hang 
time on the working channel. 
• If receiving an analog I-Call, the radio will respond in analog mode during the hang time. 
• When using the "WHC" feature to respond to an I-Call (after the hang time has expired), the call will 
be transmitted in the mode defined by the system mode as programmed for the current system if the 
ID being called is not in the I-Call list. If the ID is in the I-Call list, then the call will be transmitted as 
defined by the I-Call mode programmed in the list for that ID. 
DTMF 
The overdial and hot keypad features for transmitting DTMF tones are not available while in ProVoice 
Digital Mode. 
ERROR Messages 
If any of the following error messages are displayed, the radio was either programmed incorrectly or 
needs servicing:  
DSP ERR 
ERR=xxxx  DSP ERR  DIGV ERR 
Power Up Only 
If the ProVoice circuit board is not responding, correctly, one of the following error messages will be 
displayed and the radio needs servicing: 
HARDWARE 
ERR=  3X 
 3X will be a number between 30 and 38 
8.8.4 ProVoice Private Mode 
ProVoice private mode allows the radio to transmit encrypted messages and receive clear or private 
transmissions. The radio will transmit private if the group/channel is programmed for private operation 
and forced operation is pre-programmed. 
If the radio was pre-programmed for auto-select, the radio will transmit in the following modes; 
• If Private mode is enabled, transmissions are always in private mode. 

MM-014716-001 
52 
• If Private mode is disabled and a private call is received, the Reply transmission will be in Private 
mode if the transmission is made during the scan hangtime. If the reply transmission occurs after the 
scan hangtime, the transmission will be in Clear mode. 
When operating on a group or channel programmed for private mode, all transmissions will be private 
transmissions and the radio will receive clear and private signals. If the selected group or channel is 
programmed for auto-select capability, the mode can be toggled between private and clear with the OPT 
or  OPTION button. Radios programmed for forced private operation do not allow a change of the 
transmit mode; therefore, the OPT or OPTION has no effect. 
8.8.4.1 Displaying the Currently Used Cryptographic Key Number  
To display the cryptographic key currently in use for either the system encryption key (for special call 
such as individual, phone, all, agency or fleet) or the group/channel key (for group or conventional calls), 
perform the following procedure (Not Available on Conventional radios): 
1. Press the MENU button. 
2. Use   to select DISP KEY. Then press the MENU button. 
3. Then use   to toggle between displaying the system key or the group/channel key. 
Table 8-4: Current Cryptographic Key Display 
ENCRYPTION KEY 
DISPLAYED  MESSAGE DISPLAYED 
System  "SYS KEY" 
"KEY = 1" 
Group/Channel  "GRP KEY"/"CHN KEY" 
"KEY = 2"/KEY = 2" 
8.8.4.2 Key Zero 
All cryptographic keys can be zeroed (erased from radio memory) by pressing the CLR button (System 
Model) or CLEAR (Scan Model) and while still pressing this button, press and hold the OPT button 
(System Model) or OPTION (Scan Model). Press both buttons for 2 seconds. A series of warning beeps 
will begin at the start of this 2-second period and then switch to a solid tone after the keys have been 
zeroed. The display will indicate KEY ZERO. 
If the cryptographic key(s) are zeroed, one or more keys must be transferred from the Key Loader into the 
radio before private communications can continue. (Refer to Key Manager TQS3416 Administration and 
Software Release Notes for further information.) 
8.8.5 Private Operation 
8.8.5.1 Receiving an Encrypted Call 
When receiving, the radio automatically switches between clear or private operation. If the transmission 
being received is an encrypted transmission, it will be decrypted, the receiver will unsquelch and the 
message will be heard in the speaker. The selected group or channel must be programmed for private 
operation and the correct cryptographic key must be loaded into the radio for this to occur. 

MM-014716-001 
53 
8.8.5.2 Transmitting an Encrypted Call 
1. Select the desired group or channel. 
2. Place the radio in private mode by pressing the OPT button (System Model) or OPTION (Scan 
Model).  
If the last state of the radio was private mode, the private mode will be enabled on power up. In 
addition, the private mode will be enabled if forced operation has been programmed in the radio 
If a group or channel is not programmed for private mode operation, PVT DIS will be displayed if an 
attempt is made to enable private transmit mode. It is not possible to operate on this group/channel in 
private mode. 
If the radio is programmed for forced private transmit operation, FRCD PVT will be displayed if an 
attempt is made to disable private transmit mode. It is not possible to transmit on this group/channel 
in clear mode. 
If the radio does not have the correct encryption key loaded, NO KEY # will be displayed and the 
call will not be transmitted. 
3. Continue with standard transmission procedures. A private mode access tone will be heard when the 
PTT button is pressed. 
8.8.5.3 Scanned Group Calls 
Receiving a scanned group call is the same as receiving a selected group call. During the scan hang time, 
if the radio was programmed for auto-select, it will transmit back in the same mode it received the call. 
For example, if a clear group is entered in the scan list, it will only receive clear calls. If the same group 
was available in private and entered in the scan list, it can receive clear and private calls, provided auto-
select was programmed in the radio. The user can select transmitting on the scanned or selected group. If 
a group is entered in the scan list more than once in different modes (clear, digital, private), only the first 
occurrence of the group will be used. 
8.8.6 Conventional Operation 
8.8.6.1 Outside Address 
The same outside address (works similar to Channel Guard operation) must be programmed in the 
transmitting and receiving radios when ProVoice digital or private operation is enabled. If address is not 
correct, the radios will not communicate. 
8.8.6.2 Channel Guard 
Channel Guard encode is transmitted on analog clear channels only. Channel Guard decode will operate 
on either a clear or private channel. The exception is when G-STAR signaling is used (see G-STAR 
paragraph). 
8.8.6.3 G-STAR 
When G-STAR is programmed on a private channel, the radio will transmit G-STAR in clear mode and 
then switch to private for the voice portion of the call. If G-STAR is sent with Channel Guard, then both 
are sent in clear mode and the radio switches to private mode. Emergency G-STAR data burst is 
transmitted in clear mode. 

MM-014716-001 
54 
8.9 MACRO KEY OPERATION 
Macro key operation permits the user to accomplish a series of keystrokes with a single "macro" 
keystroke. Up to ten (10) macro keys can be defined, each capable of executing up to twenty (20) 
keystrokes, to any pushbutton input (i.e., keypad keys, buttons, etc.). Each macro key can be pre-
programmed to activate when pressed or when released. 
A macro key can also be pre-programmed to change the keystroke sequence the next time the macro key 
is activated. 
For detail operation and assignment of macro keys, contact your communications supervisor or 
administrator. 

MM-014716-001 
55 
9  EDACS AND P25 TRUNKED OPERATION 
9.1  RADIO STATUS ICONS 
Status icons are indicators that show the various operating characteristics of the radio.   
Figure 9-1: Typical Display 
Table 9-1: Icons and Descriptions 
ICON  DESCRIPTION 
Indicates the EDACS system is in Failsoft™ mode (if enabled through 
programming).  
 Indicates selected group or channel is in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 1 in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 2 in scan list. 
 Scan mode enabled. 
 Volume bars – indicates relative volume level. 
 Indicates the current channel is set up as an analog channel. 
 Indicates the current channel is set up as a ProVoice channel. 
 Receiving or transmitting Encrypted Calls. 
 Special call mode (individual or telephone). 

MM-014716-001 
56 
9.2 MESSAGES 
During radio operation, various messages are displayed on either line 1 or line 2. Typical messages 
include control channel status information, such as system busy or call denied, or messages associated 
with the radio's operation, (i.e. volume adjust). These messages are described as follows: 
Table 9-2: Display Messages 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
QUEUED  Call Queued  Indicates the system has placed the call in a request queue. 
SYS BUSY  System Busy  Indicates the system is busy, no channels are currently available, the queue is full or 
an individual call is being attempted to a radio that is currently transmitting. 
DENIED  Call Denied  Indicates the radio is not authorized to operate on the selected system. 
CC SCAN  Control Channel Scan  Indicates the control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Control Channel 
Scan mode to search for the control channel. 
WA SCAN  Wide Area Scan  Indicates the control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Wide Area Scan 
mode to search for a new system (if enabled through programming). 
*RXEMER*  Receive Emergency  Indicates an emergency call is being received. This message will be flashing on line 2. 
*TXEMER*  Transmit Emergency  Indicates an emergency call has been transmitted. This message will be flashing on 
line 2. 
VOL=31  Volume Level  Indicates the current volume level. The volume level display ranges from OFF (silent) 
to 31 (loudest). 
UNKNOWN  Caller's ID Not 
Received  Indicates that an individual call is being received, but the caller's ID was not received. 
TX DATA  Transmit Data  Indicates the radio is transmitting a data call. 
RX DATA  Receive Data  Indicates the radio is receiving a data call. Displayed on line 2. 
DATA OFF  Data OFF  Indicates the radio is in the data disabled state. Displayed on line 1. 
DATA ON  Data ON  Indicates the radio has been toggled to the data enable state. Displayed for two 
seconds on line 1 when toggled to enable state. 
SYSC ON  System Scan 
Features ON  Indicates the System Scan features are enabled. 
SYSC OFF  System Scan 
Features OFF  Indicates the System Scan features are disabled. 
PA ON  Public Address ON  Indicates that the public address function of the radio is enabled. 
PA OFF  Public Address OFF  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that public address function of the radio was 
disabled. 
ALRM ON  External Alarm 
Enabled  Indicates that the external alarm function of the radio is enabled. 
ALRM OFF  External Alarm 
Disabled  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that the external alarm function of the radio was 
disabled. 
PVT DIS  Private Mode 
Disabled  Indicates that private mode is disabled or no encryption key has been programmed for 
the selected group/channel or special call. 
FRCD PVT  Forced Private 
Operation  Indicates that forced private operation has been pre-programmed into radio. 
NO KEY #  Encryption Key 
Missing  Flashing indicator indicates that no encryption key or an incorrect encryption key is 
programmed into the radio. 
BCKL=1-6  Backlight  Indicates the display intensity and keypad backlight level. 
GR  Group ID  Indicates that the call is a group call and is followed by the GID of the caller. 
ID  Individual ID  Indicates the call is an individual call and the ID number of the caller, example "ID 
2725." 

MM-014716-001 
57 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
WHC=1  Who Has Called 
This display indicates the number from the Who Has Called list. Individual calls 
received but not responded to are stored in a Who Has Called list. This list is 
accessible by pressing the # key and then the INDV key after the Individual call has 
timed out or the Clear button is pressed. This display is on line 2 and the LID of the 
caller is displayed on the top line. Currently the list is not implemented and the display 
will always be WHC=1. 
PHONE  Phone Call  Displayed when a phone call is received from the site. It is displayed in line 1 of the 
display. Line 2 of the display will contain the display *INDV* when line 1 contains this 
message. The radio interprets a received phone call as an individual call. 
CONV FS  Conventional Failsoft  Displayed when a failure of the EDACS system occurs. All communication will be in 
conventional mode. 
MENU   Displayed when the menu key is pressed and remains displayed in line 1 until a menu 
item is selected. 
SYS=1-64  System = 1 - 64  The system number for the current base station of the system displayed in line 1. It is 
displayed in line 2 of the display. Press the system key to obtain this display. 
GRP=1-64  Group = 1 - 64 
The group number of the group displayed in line 2 of display. It is displayed in line 1 of 
the display. Press the group key to obtain this display. There are up to 48 groups 
available (i.e. 3 banks of 16). The maximum number of groups programmed in a radio 
is determined by the personality. 
INDV=1-99  Individual = 1 - 99  Indicates which item in the individual call list is being displayed. It is displayed in line 2 
of the display. The name or ID of the item in the list is displayed in line 1 of the 
display. 
PHN=1-99  Phone = 1 - 99  Indicates which item in the phone list is being displayed. It is displayed in line 2 of the 
display. Line 1 of the display will be the last 3 characters of the list item contents. 
SEL PHN  Select Phone  After pressing the PHN key, selecting an entry from the phone list by typing the entry 
number will display this message on Line 1. 
SEL INDV  Select Individual ID  Displayed on line 1 when an entry from the individual ID list is selected after pressing 
the INDV key. The entry is a number between 1 and 32 inclusive. 
SYS ALL  System All Call  Displayed on line 1 to indicate a system all-call has been received. 
Ggg-v.vv  Code Group and  
Revision Number 
This is code group and revision number that is displayed in line 2 when the menu item 
“REVISION” is selected. The ‘gg’ is the group number of the software. The first ‘v’ is 
the hardware version and ‘vv’ is the revision of the software. 
*PHONE*  Phone Call  Displayed when an initiated phone call is in progress. This is displayed on line 2 of the 
display. 
NO ENTRY   Indicates that there is no data stored in one of the programmable items in either the 
phone list or individual call list. The user programmable items are items 1 through 10 
in each list. 
INV SYS  Invalid System  Displayed when the current system is an invalid type. 
CHN=1-99  Channel = 1 - 99  Displayed on line 1 of the display. This is a conventional channel index displayed 
when the group key is pressed. 
FIX LIST  Fixed List  The Priority scan list is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete keys. 
FIXED P1  Fixed Priority 1  The Priority 1 scan channel is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete 
keys. 
(c) 2004   Displayed in line 2 when the message ‘M/A-COM’ is displayed in line 1 while 
displaying different items under the menu when “REVISION” is selected by the 
operator. 
EM  Emergency  Indicates an emergency has been declared by the LID that follows the display, “EM.” 
An example of this is “EM 01201.” 
*INDV*  Individual Call  Displayed in line 2 of the display when an individual call is in progress (trunked and 
T99 modes only). 
*GROUP*  Group Call  Indicates a group call is in progress and is displayed on line 1 of the display (trunked 
and T99 modes only). 
SPKR ON  External Speaker ON  Displayed when the external speaker is enabled. 
SPKR OFF  External Speaker 
OFF  Displayed when the external speaker is disabled. 

MM-014716-001 
58 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
BANK=1-8   The bank of keys that are going to be loaded when the keyloader loads encryption 
keys. This is only valid for radios that support VGS, VGE, or DES encryption. It is 
displayed on line 2 of the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
REGR_0x  Dynamic Regroup  Indicates which group in the dynamic regroup operation has been enabled, where “x” 
is a digit of 1 to 8. 
KEY LOAD    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
KEY ZERO   Displayed on line 2 of the display when the reset and option buttons are pressed 
simultaneously for approximately two seconds. The encryption keys are zeroed. 
SYS KEY  System Key  Displayed on line 1 of the display in the display key mode of the menu. It is followed in 
the second line with a key number “KEY = <1..7>”. 
GRP KEY  Group Key  Displayed on line 1 of the display in the display key mode of the menu for trunked 
systems only. It is followed in the second line with a key number “KEY = <1..7>.” 
KEY=1-7   Displayed on line 2 of the display in the display key mode of the menu for 
conventional systems when the “SYS KEY” or “CHN KEY” is displayed in line 1 and 
for trunked systems when the “SYS KEY” or “GRP KEY” is displayed in line 1. 
PRIMARY    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the primary keys are enabled. 
PRS NAME  Personality Name  Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The 
personality name is displayed on line 2 at the same time. 
M/A-COM   Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The 
copyright year is shown in line 2 of display at the same time “(c) 2007.” 
9.3 ALERT TONES 
The M7300 series mobile radio also provides audible alert tones or “beeps” to indicate the various 
operating conditions. These alert tones can be enabled or disabled through programming. 
Table 9-3: Alert Tones 
NAME  TONE  DESCRIPTION 
Call Originate  A short mid-pitched tone.  Sounds after keying the radio (Push-To-Talk button is 
pressed). Indicates the radio has been assigned a 
working channel 
Autokey  A mid-pitched tone. 
After being placed in a queue or releasing the PTT 
button prior to a working channel assignment, the site 
calls the radio when a channel becomes available.  At 
this point, the radio automatically keys the transmitter 
(autokey) for a short period to hold the channel.  The 
radio sounds a mid-pitched tone when it is clear to talk.  
Immediately press the PTT button to keep the assigned 
channel. 
Call Queued  A high-pitched tone. 
Sounds after pressing the PTT button indicating the 
system has placed the call request in the queue. The 
receiving unit(s) also sound(s) the tones to indicate they 
will receive a call shortly. 
System Busy  Three low-pitched beeps. 
Sounds if the radio is keyed when the system is busy, if 
no channels are available for sending the message, if 
the call queue is full, or if an individual call is being 
attempted to a radio that is transmitting. 
Call Denied  A low-pitched tone.   Indicates the radio is not authorized on the system that 
has been selected. 

MM-014716-001 
59 
NAME  TONE  DESCRIPTION 
Carrier Control Timer  Five short high-pitched 
warning tones followed by a 
long low-pitched tone. 
Sounds if the programmed time for continuous 
transmission is exceeded. The transmitter will shut down 
shortly after the alert, interrupting communications. 
Release and re-key the PTT button to maintain 
communications. This will reset the carrier control timer 
and turn the transmitter back on. 
Key Press Alert  A short tone.  Indicates a key has been pressed. A short low-pitched 
tone indicates no action was taken because the key is 
not active in the current mode. 
Page (P25 T Only)  Three high-pitched tones.   In P25 trunked mode, if the receiving radio accepts a 
page, both the receiving and transmitting radios emit 
three high-pitched tones. 
Out of Range  One low pitched.  Indicates the radio is in Wide Area Scan. Radio will 
periodically beep when in Wide Area Scan. 
9.4 MENU 
The menu function accesses features that are not available directly from the keypad. The order and 
specific number of menu items available is configurable through programming. Upon radio power up, the 
menu item at the beginning of the menu list will always be displayed first. Subsequent access to the menu 
function will return the last menu item that was shown in the display. To enter the menu mode, press 
MENU. The   ramp control, and CLR are used during the selection process. All of the selection 
mode rules previously detailed apply to the menu item selection process with the exception of direct 
access. The radio will continue to receive and transmit normally while in the menu function. 
A new item is displayed by using the   ramp control to scroll through the list in increasing and 
decreasing order. The displayed menu item is made active by pressing MENU. 
After entering the menu selection mode, the following generic display format will appear. 
M E N U 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Line 1 indicates the radio is in the menu selection mode. Line 2 indicates the menu item (YYYYYYYY) 
that is to be viewed or changed (some menu items provide radio information and do not have changeable 
parameters). 

MM-014716-001 
60 
An example of the menu item selection process and menu item parameter change is detailed below for the 
contrast menu item. 
1. Press MENU to enter the menu mode. 
2. Press the   ramp control until the display shows: 
M E N U 
CONTRAST 
3. Press MENU. The contrast menu item is activated and the display will be similar to the following: 
CNTRST  =  X 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 
Line 1 shows the active menu item and its current parameter setting (XXX). Line 2 shows the 
currently selected system or group name (YYYYYYYY). 
4. The menu item's parameter setting shown in the display can now be changed by using the   
ramp control to scroll through the list of parameter values. Once the desired setting is reached, press 
MENU to store the value and return to the normal display. For menu items that display radio 
information, use   to scroll through a list of informational displays. The menu items are listed in 
Table 9-4. 
Table 9-4: Menu Item Information 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Contrast Adjust 
Menu Item:  
CONTRAST 
Once selected: 
 CNTRST= 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8  Selects the Contrast level. 
Radio Revision 
Information  Menu item: 
 REVISION 
Informational  
displays only  
(see radio); no user  
selectable settings. 
Selects the information display to view. 
Phone Call 
Menu item:  
PHN CALL 
Once selected:  See 
Telephone Interconnect  
Call Section 
  Allows access to the Phone Call Feature. 
Individual Call 
Menu Item:   
IND CALL  
Once Selected: See 
Individual Call Section 
  Allows access to the Individual Call Feature. 
External Alarm  Menu Item:  EXTALARM  
Once Selected:  
EXTALARM ON, OFF  EXTALARM replaces the system name on the 
display as long as the external alarm feature is 
enabled. 
Public 
Address 
Menu item:  
PUB ADDR  
Once selected:  
PA ON or  
PA OFF 
ON, OFF  Public Address is toggled ON and OFF. 
External Speaker 
Menu item:  
EXT SPKR 
Once selected: 
SPKR ON or 
SPKR OFF 
ON, OFF  External Speaker is toggled ON and OFF. 

MM-014716-001 
61 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Encryption Key 
Loading 
Menu item: KEYLOAD  
Once selected:  
KEY LOAD BANK = N Up to 8 banks of  7 keys  Enables the radio to accept the loading of encryption 
keys. 
Display Current 
Encryption 
Key(s) 
Menu item: DISP KEY 
Once selected:  
 SYS KEY, GRP KEY or 
CHN KEY and KEY = N 
  Displays current encryption key number. 
Scan  Menu item: SCAN ON, OFF  Toggles scan function ON or OFF. 
Private Mode  Menu Item: PRIVATE 
Once selected: PVT or key 
light.  ON, OFF  Toggles private function ON or OFF. 
Scan Add  Menu item: SCAN ADD 
Once selected: Proper scan 
icon displayed.  S, 2 or 1  Adds group or channel to scan list. 
Scan Delete  Menu item: SCAN DEL 
Once selected: Scan icon 
goes out.    Deletes group or channel from scan list. 
Scan Add/Delete  Menu item: SCAN A/D 
When selected: Toggles 
through scan selections 
Toggle sequence 
S, 2, 1, S, ...  Changes present group or channel to next scan 
choice in scan list. 
Last Scanned 
Channel Recall 
Menu Item: SCAN ADD 
Press twice when actively 
receiving; three times when 
not receiving. Scan icon 
displayed. 
 Changes the selected channel to the last scanned 
channel. 
Home group or 
channel selection 
Menu item: HOME 
Once selected: Home group 
or channel displayed.   Changes to the group or channel defined for Home 
function. 
System select  Menu item: SYS SEL 
Once selected: SYS = n 1-64 = (n)umber of desired 
system  Displays the system selected. 
External alarm #2 Menu item: EXTALRM2 ON, OFF  Toggles external alarm #2 feature ON or OFF. 
System and group 
selection 
Menu item: SYSGRP 1 
Menu item: SYSGRP 2 
Menu item: SYSGRP 3 
Menu item: SYSGRP 4 
Menu item: SYSGRP 5 
 Changes to the System & Group/Channel 
programmed for SYSGRP 1-5. 
Mute  Menu item: MUTE ON, OFF  Toggles the mute function ON or OFF to control the 
audio output from the selected radio. 
Mute #1  Menu item: MUTE 1 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 1 function ON or OFF on radio 
#1. 
Mute #2  Menu item: MUTE 2 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 2 function ON or OFF on radio 
#2. 
Multiple radio 
operation  Menu item: RADIO ON, OFF  Toggles the currently selected radio. 
Menu item: RADIO 1 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #1. 
Radio selection  Menu item: RADIO 2 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #2. 
No Data  Menu item: NO DATA ON, OFF  Toggles data feature ON or OFF. 
EDACS Convent-
ional Priority 1 
Scan  Menu item: ECP1SCAN ON, OFF  Toggles this feature ON or OFF. 
Group selection   Menu item: GRP SEL 
Once selected: GRP = n 1-64 = (n)umber of desired 
group  Displays the group selected. 
Status Condition   Menu item: STATUS Once 
selected: ST  =n 0-9 = (n)umber of pre-
programmed status  Transmits the pre-programmed status message. 
Message 
Condition   Menu item: MESSAGE 
Once selected: MSG  =n 0-9 = (n)umber of pre-
programmed messages  Transmits the pre-programmed message. 
Feature 
Encryption 
Display 
Menu Item: FEATURES 
Once selected: 
See Feature Encryption 
Display section 
Informational displays only; 
no user selectable settings 
Indicates current features program- med into the 
radio as well as certain information required to add 
features to the radio (refer to the Table of Contents 
for Feature Encryption Display. 

MM-014716-001 
62 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
System Scan 
Enable 
Menu Item: SYS SCAN 
Once selected: SYSC ON 
or SYSC OFF ON, OFF  System Scan features like ProScan are toggled ON 
and OFF. 
9.5 RECEIVING A CALL 
1. Turn the radio on by rotating the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob clockwise (out of detent). A 
short alert signal (if enabled through programming) indicates the radio is ready to use. 
2. The display shows the last selected or the power up (depending on programming) system and group 
names. If the radio is unable to obtain a control channel, line 2 shows CC SCAN. 
3. Adjust the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob to the desired volume level. 
4. Select the desired system and group. The display indicates the current system and group names. 
5. The radio is now ready to receive calls. 
6. When the radio receives a group call, it unmutes on the assigned working channel and the BSY 
indicator comes on. Line 1 shows GR followed by the logical ID number (if received) of the unit 
sending the message, or the associated name if the ID number is found in the individual call list. 
9.6  SENDING A CALL 
1. Turn the radio on and set the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob to the desired volume level. Select 
the desired system and group. 
2. Press and hold the PTT button. The radio will display the system and group names and perform the 
necessary signaling required to obtain a communication channel. 
3. When the working channel is assigned, TX and BSY indicators are turned ON and a short beep is 
sounded indicating communication can begin.  
If two or more tones, or a high-pitched tone is heard, the system may be busy and the 
call request has been placed in queue or the request has been denied for some reason. 
Refer to the Section 9.3 for more details. 
4. Hold the microphone approximately three inches from the mouth and speak in a normal voice. 
5. Release the PTT button when the transmission is complete and listen for a reply. 
9.7 CONVENTIONAL FAILSOFT 
In the unlikely event of a failure of the EDACS system, communications can take place in conventional 
failsoft mode. The radio will be automatically directed to a communications channel set up for this 
purpose. During this mode of operation, the control unit will display CONV FS in the alphanumeric 
display. An increase in activity on the channel during conventional failsoft operation may be noticed, so 
be careful not to transmit until the channel is clear. 
Operation during conventional failsoft will be the same as operation on a conventional system, except that 
it will not be possible to select a communications channel, or use emergency and special call. When 
trunking is restored, the radio will automatically be returned to normal operation. 

MM-014716-001 
63 
Emergency and Special Call are not operational during conventional failsoft. In 
addition, the GRP control will not operate. 
9.8 EMERGENCY OPERATION 
The radio's ability to declare an emergency, clear an emergency, remain locked on an emergency and 
group, and the emergency audio and display freeze can each be enabled or disabled through 
programming. When an emergency is declared scanning will stop and will restart only after the 
emergency has been cleared. 
9.8.1 Receiving an Emergency Call 
When receiving an emergency call from the selected group and system, an alert beep is heard and the 
BSY indicator lights. The message *RXEMER* flashes in the display on line 2 until the emergency 
condition is cleared. Follow standard emergency procedures. 
9.8.2  Declaring an Emergency 
To send an emergency call to the selected system and group (or on an optionally pre-programmed 
emergency group), proceed as follows: 
1. Press and hold the red emergency button for approximately one second. (This time is programmable 
and therefore could be longer or shorter. Check with the system administrator.) The radio will 
transmit an emergency call request with the radio ID until an emergency channel assignment is 
received. 
2. When the working channel assignment is received, the radio sounds a single beep (Autokey alert 
tone) indicating it is ready for voice transmission. *TXEMER* flashes on line 2 in the display until 
the emergency is cleared. 
3. Press PTT and speak into the microphone in a normal voice. 
4. Release PTT when the transmission is complete and listen for a reply. 
5. The emergency can be cleared by pressing and holding the CLR button followed by pressing the red 
emergency button then releasing both buttons. 
9.9  SYSTEM SCAN OPERATION 
The radio can be programmed with the following System Scan features. These features are automatically 
enabled upon radio power up. A key or menu option is also defined to allow the System Scan features to 
be toggled during radio operation. This is covered in the Menu Selection and Pre-Programmed Keypad 
Key sections. The System Scan state will be maintained through system changes but will default to ON at 
power up. 
9.9.1  Wide Area System Scan 
The M7300 Series mobile radio can be programmed for wide area system scan operation for multi-site 
applications. Upon the loss of the currently selected system's control channel, radios can be programmed 
to automatically scan the control channels of other systems. If a new control channel is found, the radio 
will switch to the new system and sound an alert tone. 

MM-014716-001 
64 
9.9.2 ProScan 
The radio can be programmed for ProScan™ system scan operation for multi-site applications depending 
on the version of radio flash code. ProScan provides the radio with the ability to select a new system for 
the radio to communicate on, when the selected system drops below a predefined level. This is 
accomplished by enabling each radio to analyze the signal quality of its current control channel and 
compare it with the signal quality of the control channel for each site in its adjacency scan list. (The signal 
quality metric used for the ProScan algorithm is based on a combination of both Received Signal Strength 
Indicator [RSSI] and Control Channel Verification [CCV] measurements.)  When the selected system’s 
signal quality level degrades below a pre-programmed level, the radio will begin to look for a better 
control channel. Once a control channel that exceeds the pre-programmed parameters is found, the radio 
will change to the new system and emit a tone. If the control channel is completely lost the radio, will 
enter Wide Area System Scanning and search the programmed adjacent systems until a suitable control 
channel is found. 
9.9.3  Priority System Scan 
The radio can also be programmed for Priority System Scan. (To ensure that this feature operates 
correctly, the control channel of the priority system must be located on channel one unless you are using 
the ProScan algorithm.)  The priority system is the desired or preferred system. While receiving the 
control channel of the selected system, the radio will periodically leave the selected system and search for 
the control channel of the priority system at a programmable rate. The programmable rate is defined by 
the value in the Priority Scan Time control, (unless the ProSound/ProScan algorithm is enabled as 
explained below). This priority scan timer is reset each time the PTT button is pressed or when a call is 
received. If the priority system control channel is found, or meets the predefined ProScan criteria, the 
radio will automatically switch to the priority system. 
9.9.4  When Wide Area System Scan Is Enabled 
If the radio cannot find the control channel of the selected system and begins Wide Area System Scan 
(WA Scan), the radio will only scan for the priority system control channel if the priority system is in the 
WA Scan list. 
9.9.5  When ProScan Is Enabled 
The radio monitors the priority system and will switch to the priority system if the priority system meets 
the criteria defined in the “ProSound/ProScan Options” dialog box. If ProScan is enabled, the rate at 
which the radio will scan for the priority system is defined by the System Sample Time control. 
9.9.6 Menu Selection 
Press MENU and then use the   ramp control to scroll through the selections until SYS SCAN is 
displayed. Then press MENU to toggle the System Scan state. The SYSC ON or SYSC OFF display 
message is displayed for two seconds to show the new state. 
9.9.7  Pre-Programmed Keypad Key 
Press the pre-programmed key and the SYSC ON or SYSC OFF display message is displayed for two 
seconds to show the new state. 

MM-014716-001 
65 
9.10  GROUP SCAN OPERATION 
Only Groups that are part of the radio's scan list will be scanned. Groups are added to the scan list on a 
per system basis through programming, the radio keypad, or both, dependent upon programming. This 
scan list can be changed by the user from the keypad unless programmed otherwise. Each system's group 
scan list is retained in memory when the radio is turned off. The M7300 Series mobile radio can also be 
programmed to provide Trunked Priority Group Scan capability, which operates similar to priority scan in 
Conventional mode. 
The following is a description of programmable scan features that should be helpful in understanding the 
Group Scan Operation of the radio: 
Scan Hang Time - the delay time the radio waits before resuming scan after the push-to-talk is released 
or after the carrier has dropped a channel. 
TX Select - the group the radio will transmit on while scanning. The radio is programmed to transmit on 
either the scanned group or the selected group. 
Scan List (privileges) - this feature allows or prohibits scan list changes by the user. 
P1 Programming - priority group programming is accomplished by one (and only one) of three methods: 
• From the keypad, where the Priority programming is not fixed and does not follow the selected 
channel, 
• Priority 1 group programming follows the selected channel, or 
• Priority 1 group programming is fixed during PC programming and cannot be changed by the user. 
P1 Always Scan - determines if the Priority 1 Group will always be scanned, regardless of the scan state 
set by the user. 
9.10.1 Adding Groups to a Scan List 
1. With scan operation turned off, select the desired group to add to the selected Trunked system group 
scan list. 
2. Press (+) or (-) with   to display the current priority status of the group on line 1 for a time-out 
period.  
3. While the status is displayed, press (+) with   to add the group to the scan list.   is displayed. 
4. Press (+) with   a second time to set the group to Priority 2.   is displayed. 
5. Press (+) with   a third time to set the group to Priority 1.   is displayed in column 1, line 1. 
The priority level selection sequence only advances the group to next higher priority level and stops 
at priority level 1. To select a lower priority level, the group must be deleted from the scan list and 
then added back to the scan list. Each new group added to the scan list starts at the lowest priority. If 
the Priority 1 and Priority 2 groups are already set and a new group is assigned as Priority 1 or 
Priority 2, the previously assigned group will change to non-priority scanning. 
9.10.2 Deleting Groups from a Scan List 
1. With scan operation turned off, select the desired group to delete from the selected trunked system's 
group scan list. 

MM-014716-001 
66 
2. Press (+) or (-) with  . The current scan status of the group is displayed for a time-out period. 
3. Press (-) with   to delete the group from the scan list.  ,   or   turns off. Any group that is 
not in a trunked system group scan list will show a “blank” when it is the selected channel. 
9.10.3 Nuisance Delete 
A group can also be deleted from the scan list, if it is not the currently selected group by pressing (-) with 
 during scan operation while the radio is displaying the unwanted group. The group will be deleted 
from the system's group scan list in the same manner as if done using the steps above. Deletions 
performed in this manner will not remain deleted if the radio is turned off and then back on. 
9.10.4 Turning Scan On 
1. Toggle scan operation by pressing SCAN. The SCAN indicator turns on when the radio is scanning. 
The  SCAN key light blinks when temporarily disabled. Scanning will stop while 
microphone is off-hook if the hookswitch feature is enabled through programming. 
2. When a group on the scan list receives a channel assignment, the radio unmutes on the assigned 
channel, the BSY indicator comes on and the received scan group is displayed. 
• The radio will continue scanning if a new group is selected when scan is on. 
• Pressing the PTT button when scan is on will cause the radio to transmit on the displayed group 
or on the currently selected group depending on programming. 
• Pressing up with   when scan is on will cause the radio to recall the scanned group that was 
last received. This group is recalled for a period equal to the scan hang time. 
9.10.5 Priority Group Scanning 
When scan is enabled and the Priority 1 and Priority 2 groups have been identified, the radio will listen to 
calls on those groups and the selected group. While receiving a scanned group call, the radio will continue 
to monitor the selected Priority 1 and Priority 2 groups and will drop the call if the selected group or other 
higher priority call becomes active. During a Priority 2 call the radio will continue to monitor for a 
Priority 1 group call. 
The radio will monitor for Agency and Fleet calls that correspond to the Agency and Fleet associated with 
the Priority 1 and Priority 2 groups. Priority Agency and Fleet calls will be indicated by displaying 
AGENCY or FLEET on the System line of the display and associated Priority 1 or 2 group on the Group 
line of the display. 
9.10.6 Turning Scan Off 
Toggle scan operation off by pressing SCAN. The radio will resume operation on the selected group. 

MM-014716-001 
67 
9.11 INDIVIDUAL CALLS 
9.11.1 Receiving and Responding to an Individual Call 
When the radio receives an individual call (a call directed only to the user's radio), it unmutes on the 
assigned working channel and turns on the BSY indicator. Line 1 shows “ID” followed by the logical ID 
number of the radio sending the message, or the associated name if the ID number is found in the 
individual call list. The individual call indicator will display *INDV* on line 2. The radio can be 
programmed to ring when an individual call is received. If enabled, the ring begins five seconds after the 
caller unkeys and will continue until the PTT button, the CLR button, or IND is pressed. 
Hookswitch functions the same as CLR key in I-CALL, phone call, and menu modes. 
If a response is made to the call prior to the programmed call-back time-out, the call will automatically be 
directed to the originating unit. If a response is not made before the call-back time-out, the radio will 
return to normal receive mode, but * WHC * will be displayed. If the caller's ID is not received, 
UNKNOWN will display for the duration of the call and there will be no call-back hang time. 
To respond after the call-back time-out, press the IND key. The radio's display will show the callers ID on 
the first line and WHCI=1 on the second line. Pressing the PTT button at this point will initiate an 
individual call back to the original caller. (If the last call was a group call, the display will show 
WHCG=1. Pressing the PTT button will place the call as an individual call.) 
The radio stores the IDs of the last 10 callers in the Calls Received List as shown. Individual calls are 
stored in the top half of the list (1-10) and group calls are stored in the bottom half of the list (1-10). The 
most recent call is stored in position 1, the second most recent call is stored in position 2, etc. 
To access the list, press the IND key twice. Use   to scroll through the list. Press the MENU key to 
display the time elapsed since the call was received. 
9.11.2 Call Storage Lists 
There are two lists available for call storage in the radio, the calls received list (1-10) and the personality 
list (1-99 as defined by the user). When the individual call mode is entered by pressing IND, the calls 
received list is available. The user can toggle to the personality list by selecting any key other than DIS or 

MM-014716-001 
68 
toggle between the two lists by pressing the IND key. If wrap is enabled, the calls received list wraps on 
itself and not into the other list. 
The saved call list shows all ten storage locations. If no calls have been received, the saved call list will be 
empty and the pre-stored list will be available upon entering the individual call mode. 
When in the saved call list, pressing MENU toggles the time stamp ON and OFF. The time stamp 
indicates how long ago the call was received. The display indicates this information as HH:MM:SS where 
HH = hours, MM = minutes and SS = seconds. 
When in the pre-stored list, pressing MENU toggles the Logical IDentification (LID) ON and OFF. 
9.11.3 Sending an Individual Call 
The following procedures describe how to initiate and complete an individual call. 
1. To select a previously stored individual, select the I-Call mode from the menu or press IND followed 
by the   ramp control to scroll through the list of stored individuals. The selection mode rules 
apply. While in the individual call list, the menu key will toggle the display between the call name 
and the unit ID number. If the individual is not stored in this list but the individual’s unit ID is known, 
it can be entered directly from the keypad. 
2. Press the PTT button; the radio performs the necessary signaling to obtain a communication channel. 
When the signaling is complete and the radio is clear to transmit, TX indicator turns ON and the 
channel access tone sounds. Line 1 shows the called individual's name if found in the list of stored 
individuals or ID followed by the logical ID number of the unit being called. The message *INDV* 
displays on line 2. Proceed with the message. 
9.12 SCAT OPERATION 
A SCAT™ (Single Channel Autonomous Trunking) System operates with the same set of features as a 
standard EDACS system. The only significant user change relates to the BSY indicator. Since only one 
channel, operating as both control and working channel, exists in a SCAT System, the BSY indicator will 
be ON when the SCAT channel is in the working channel mode. When the transmission on the channel is 
completed, the indicator turns OFF and indicates the return of SCAT control channel signaling. 

MM-014716-001 
69 
9.13  TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS 
9.13.1 Receiving a Telephone Interconnect Call (Trunked Mode Only) 
Receiving a telephone interconnect call is identical to receiving an individual call. See the DTMF 
Overdial Operation section if access to services requiring "over-dial" is needed. Overdial operations are 
available for any special call whether it is an individual call or a telephone interconnect call. 
9.13.2 Sending a Telephone Interconnect Call (Trunked Mode Only) 
Use the following procedures to initiate and complete a Telephone Interconnect call: 
1. To select a previously stored phone number, select phone call mode from the menu, press PHN and 
use the   ramp control to scroll through the list of stored phone numbers. The selection mode 
rules apply. While in the phone call list, the MENU key will toggle the display between the phone 
call name and the phone call number. If the phone number is not stored in this list but the phone 
number is known, it can be entered directly from the keypad. If necessary, a pause can be entered by 
pressing and holding 0-9, *, or # until an underscore appears in the display. 
2. Press and release the PTT button; the radio performs the necessary signaling to obtain a 
communication channel. When the signaling is complete and the radio is clear to transmit, TX 
indicator turns on and the channel access tone sounds. Line 1 shows the accompanying name if 
selected from the list of stored numbers or the phone number if entered directly. The message 
*PHONE* is displayed on line 2. The radio then automatically transmits the programmed number 
stored in the special call queue. 
3. Telephone ringing will be heard. When someone answers the phone, press the PTT button and speak 
into the microphone. Release the PTT button to listen to the caller. Unsuccessful interconnect 
signaling returns the radio to the normal receive mode and the number remains displayed until the 
special call is cleared by pressing the CLR button or the time-out expires or another group or system 
is selected. 
4. To terminate the call, momentarily press the CLR button. 
The M7300 Series mobile radio is capable of half-duplex conversation only. The 
caller’s message can only be sent if the PTT button is pressed (the radio is 
transmitting) and the caller can only be heard by the person being called when the PTT 
is released (the radio is receiving). 
9.13.3 DTMF Overdial/Conventional Mode Telephone Interconnect 
Once the radio has established a connection to the public telephone system, it may be necessary to "over-
dial" more digits to access banking services, answering machines, credit card calls or other types of 
systems that require DTMF (Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency) access digits. Overdial operation can also be 
used to initiate a telephone interconnect call via DTMF signaling if a dial tone has already been accessed 
on the system. This is the method that is used for making a telephone interconnect call while operating in 
the conventional mode but will also function in trunked mode if a dial tone is directly accessible. 
Telephone numbers and other number sequences for overdialing can be stored in the phone list when 
programming the radio or stored by the operator in the first ten phone list entries. These numbers are 
accessed by pressing PHN then following the selection mode rules. 
The following steps are required to dial these numbers: 

MM-014716-001 
70 
1. Follow the procedure in Sending a Telephone Interconnect Call (Trunked Mode Only) to 
establish a connection to the telephone system or consult the system administrator for the procedure 
to access a dial tone on the trunked or conventional system. 
2. Overdial numbers are transmitted using either method as follows:  
METHOD 1:  Press and hold PTT while entering the overdial number sequence from the keypad.
This method sends DTMF tones during individual, telephone interconnect, trunke
d
group, or conventional channel calls. Anytime the PTT button is pressed and held,
the keypad is enabled for DTMF entry.  
METHOD 2:   Press  PHN to enter the overdial select/entry mode and follow the selection mode
rules to call up a stored number from the phone list or to directly enter the overdial
digits. Press PTT to send the overdial sequence once. If the number needs to be
transmitted again it must be selected or entered again (this prevents unwante
d
numbers from being sent the next time the PTT button is pressed during the call).  
This overdial select/entry mode remains active until the call is dropped, cleared, or MENU is pressed. The 
overdial select/entry mode can be re-entered if the call is still active by pressing PHN. 
9.13.4 Programmable Entries 
Individual call ID numbers, telephone numbers and other number sequences for overdialing are stored in 
the special call lists when programming the radio. The first ten entry locations of these lists can be 
changed by the radio operator. The keypad is used when adding, changing and storing numbers in these 
entry locations. 
Use the following procedure to store a number in one of the first ten entries of a special call list: 
1. Press IND or PHN to enter the individual call list or the phone call list. The selection mode rules 
apply. 
2. Scroll through the list using the   ramp control until one of the first ten entries is reached. NO 
ENTRY is displayed if the location is empty. 
3. Enter the desired number. If necessary, a pause can be entered by pressing and holding 0-9, (*), or (#) 
until an underscore appears in the display. The individual call list entries will accept up to 5 digits. 
The phone call list entries accept a combination of up to 31 digits and pauses. 
4. Press and hold MENU until the display changes indicating that the number has been stored. 
5. Repeat the steps above if the number stored in an entry location needs to be changed. 
9.14 MOBILE DATA 
The M7300 Series mobile radios, when operating in the EDACS configuration, permit either voice or data 
calls to be transmitted or received. The radio can handle only one type of call at a time; however, 
selection of either data or voice is selected transparently by the operator through normal usage of the 
radio. Data communications is not supported in the conventional mode. 
The mobile radios can be connected to Mobile Data Terminals (MDT) or to a host computer. Any RS-232 
compatible device that supports the Radio Data Interface (RDI) protocol (Version 1.91 or greater) can be 
connected to the mobile radio. Support for MDTs or host computers is a programmable option per radio. 
Additionally, radios programmed for host computers can also be programmed for data only operation (no 
voice calls transmitted or received). 

MM-014716-001 
71 
Turn power to the radio OFF before connecting or disconnecting any cables, including 
the data cable. Also, turn power to the radio OFF when docking or undocking a 
connected laptop computer. Failure to turn the power OFF can damage the radio, 
requiring service by a M/A-COM approved service center. 
9.14.1 Displays 
The following will be displayed on the control unit during the various states of data mode of operation.  
TX DATA  Displayed on bottom line of display when the radio is transmitting a data call.  
RX DATA  Displayed on bottom line of display when the radio is receiving a data call.  
DATA OFF  Displayed on top line of display when the radio is in the data disabled state.  
DATA ON  Displayed for two seconds on top line of display when the radio is toggled to the data
enabled state.  
9.14.2 DATA OFF Operation 
The radio can be placed in the data disable state by any of the following methods. When the data state is 
disabled, the control unit displays "DATA OFF" on the top line. An ongoing data call is allowed to 
complete except when an emergency is declared. 
• Removing the microphone from the hookswitch (hookswitch option must be enabled by pre-
programming). 
• Declaring an emergency (not to be used unless an actual emergency condition exists). Alert tone will 
sound. 
• Pressing the OPT button (System Model) or OPTION (Scan Model) (pre-programmed). Alert tone 
will sound. 
• Selecting the function using the MENU button (pre-programmed). 
9.14.3 DATA ON Operation 
The data state is enabled by one of the following (depending on how it was disabled). “DATA ON” will 
be displayed top line of display for 2 seconds then the display returns to normal. 
• Replacing the microphone into the hookswitch (going on-hook). Only valid if the “DATA OFF” 
operation was entered by removing the microphone from the hookswitch (going off-hook). 
• Clearing an emergency, but valid only if an emergency caused “DATA OFF” operation. 
9.14.4 Exiting Data Calls 
Under normal conditions, the radio enters the scan lockout mode and returns to the control channel after 
completion of a data call (transmit or receive). If, during a data call, one of the following conditions 
occurs, the data call is immediately terminated and the radio performs the desired function: 
• The PTT is activated. 
• The PTT is in Public Address mode. 
• An emergency is declared by pressing the pre-programmed emergency button. 
• A group or system change is made. 

MM-014716-001 
72 
9.14.5 Scan Lockout Mode 
Following the transmission or reception of a data call, if scan is enabled, scanning will stop temporarily 
(duration pre-programmed). During this time the scan LED will flash to indicate that scan is enabled but 
temporarily suspended. This mode is normally exited when the pre-programmed time expires; however, 
the following actions will terminate the scan lockout mode before the timeout is completed. 
• The CLR (System Model) or CLEAR (Scan Model) button is pressed. 
• The PTT is pressed. 
• A group or system change is made. 
• Enter phone call mode. 
• Enter individual call mode. 
• A new emergency assignment has been received. 
• The PTT is pressed in Public Address Mode. 
• An emergency is declared or cleared. 
• Microphone is removed from hookswitch (OFF-hook). 
• Receiving an individual or phone call. 
• Receiving an Agency, Fleet or System All Call. 
• Pressing the SCAN button to turn scan ON or OFF. 
9.14.6 Data Lockout Mode 
The data lockout mode is a pre-programmed mode when the radio will not respond to any data channel 
assignments and prevents receive data calls from interrupting voice calls. Transmit data calls will still be 
initiated when needed by the operator. After a pre-programmed time, the radio will respond to receive 
data calls; however, the following conditions will clear the data lockout mode: 
• The CLR (System Model) or CLEAR (Scan Model) button is pressed. 
• Transmitting a data call. 
• Changing a system. 
• An emergency is declared. 
• Pressing the PTT while in Public Address mode. 
• Turning scan ON with the SCAN button. 
9.15 STATUS/MESSAGE OPERATION 
Status and message operation is possible with either the Scan or System version of the M7300 Series 
mobile radio unit. The following procedure is applicable for the System version. For operation with the 
Scan version, the four primary keycaps must be reconfigured and pre-programmed for status/message 
operation. 

MM-014716-001 
73 
9.15.1 Status Operation 
Status operation permits the transmission of a pre-programmed status condition to the EDACS site. 
To send a status condition, press the STS button (keylight comes on) then press one of the number 
buttons (0-9) to select the pre-programmed status. If no status has been programmed for the selected 
number button, the radio will display NO ENTRY and the radio will sound a low tone. A valid selection 
will permit the status text to appear in the display for a pre-programmed time. After the time-out expires 
or the MENU button has been pressed (the MENU button will override the time-out period), the status is 
selected and will be transmitted to the site or stored in the radio memory where it can be polled by the site 
at a future time. If the site receives the status properly, when transmitted or polled by the site, a high-
pitched tone sounds and the keylight associated with that status will remain lit. If the site does not receive 
the status properly, a low-pitched tone sounds and the keylight associated with the status will blink. 
If an incorrect status was selected or the incorrect number button was pressed, the status can be changed 
during the pre-programmed time-out period by pressing another number button. The status selection can 
also be cancelled by pressing the CLR button prior to the time-out period. 
To view the currently selected status after it has been transmitted, press the STS button. If the status was 
not sent successfully to the site, the text associated with the status will flash in the display. 
The radio can also be pre-programmed to redesignate the keypad buttons for ST0 thru ST9 to send status 
condition. In this configuration the radio status operation will operate as previously described except the 
STS button is not required. The keylight associated with ST0 thru ST9 will indicate which status is 
selected. 
9.15.2 Message Operation 
Message operation permits the transmission of a pre-programmed message text to an EDACS site. 
To send a message, press the MSG button (keylight comes on) then press one of the number buttons (0-9) 
to select the pre-programmed message text. If no message text has been programmed for the selected 
number button, the radio will display NO ENTRY and a low-pitched tone sounds. A valid selection will 
permit the message text to appear in the display for a pre-programmed time. After the time-out expires or 
the MENU button has been pressed (the MENU button will override the time-out period), the message 
text is selected and will be transmitted to the site. If the site receives the message properly when 
transmitted, a high pitched tone sounds and the MSG keylight remains lit. If the site does not receive the 
message properly, a low-pitched tone sounds and the MSG keylight will blink. 
If an incorrect message text was selected or the incorrect number button was pressed, the message text 
can be changed during the pre-programmed time-out period by pressing another number button. The 
message text selection can also be cancelled by pressing the CLR button prior to the time-out period. 
To view the currently selected message text after it has been transmitted, press the MSG button and then 
the CLR button prior to the time-out period. If the message text was not sent successfully to the site, the 
text associated with the message will flash in the display. 
9.16 EDACS CONVENTIONAL P1 SCAN 
This feature permits the radio user to scan a pre-programmed conventional system and channel as a 
Priority 1 (P1) channel while the radio is selected for EDACS trunked system. If activity is detected on 
the conventional P1 channel, the radio will unmute and remain on this conventional channel for the 
programmable hang time. 
The radio must be pre-programmed to designate a button for scan ON/OFF operation. 

MM-014716-001 
74 
9.17  DYNAMIC REGROUP OPERATION 
Dynamic regroup operation permits multiple talk groups (up to eight) to be added to a radio via the 
Communications Systems Director (CSD). The radio must be pre-programmed to respond to regrouping. 
Dynamic regrouping will not be activated in a radio until an activation message is sent by the system 
manager. Each radio that receives and acknowledges regrouping instructions is successfully regrouped. 
Pressing and holding the CLEAR (Scan Model) or CLR (System Model) button for 2.5 seconds toggles 
the user into and out of the dynamic regroup group set. A double beep will sound for entry or exit. The 
display will indicate REGR_0x where "x" is a digit of 1 to 8 indicating the group when dynamic regroup 
has been enabled by the user. If the radio is in dynamic regroup and the user selects a group that has not 
been regrouped, the display will show NO ENTRY. The radio will be prevented from transmitting and 
receiving calls in this condition except for scanned groups. 
9.17.1 Emergency Operation 
If the pre-programmed group set on the currently selected system contains an EMER/HOME group and 
the radio is in dynamic regroup, the radio will exit dynamic regroup and declare the emergency on the 
HOME group. If no EMER/HOME group is present, the radio will declare the emergency on the currently 
selected dynamic regroup group. 
9.18  PAGE (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) 
Page sends a PING message to a radio and functions similar to Individual Call.  
The following procedures describe how to initiate and complete a Page. 
1. To select a previously stored individual, select the Page mode from the menu followed by the   
ramp control to scroll through the list of stored individuals. The selection mode rules apply. While in 
the individual call list, the menu key toggles the display between the call name and the unit ID 
number. On System model radios, the individual’s unit ID can also be entered directly from the 
keypad. 
2. Press the PTT button; the radio performs the necessary signaling on the control channel. On the 
calling radio, line 1 shows the called individual's name if found in the list of stored individuals or ID 
followed by the logical ID number of the unit being called. If the receiving radio receives the Page 
and responds, both radios will emit three high-pitched tones. The receiving radio will also display 
PAGE and the ID of the calling radio. 

MM-014716-001 
75 
10 CONVENTIONAL OPERATION 
10.1  RADIO STATUS ICONS 
Status icons are indicators that show the various operating characteristics of the radio.  The icons appear 
on the first line of the display. 
Figure 10-1: Typical Display 
Table 10-1: Icons and Descriptions 
ICON  DESCRIPTION 
 Indicates selected group or channel is in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 1 in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 2 in scan list. 
 Indicates a conventional channel enabled with Channel Guard Function. 
 Indicates the current channel is set up as an analog channel. 
 Volume bars – indicates relative volume level. 
 Scan mode enabled. 
10.2 MESSAGES 
During radio operation, various messages are displayed on either line 1 or line 2. Typical messages 
include control channel status information, such as system busy or call denied, or messages associated 
with the radio's operation, (i.e. volume adjust). These messages are described as follows: 
Table 10-2: Display Messages 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
TALKARND  Talk-around  Indicates the radio is operating on conventional channels in talk-around mode (no repeater). 
VOL=31  Volume Level  Indicates the current volume level. The volume level display ranges from OFF (silent) to 31 
(loudest). 
UNKNOWN  Caller's ID Not 
Received  Indicates that an individual call is being received, but the caller's ID was not received. 

MM-014716-001 
76 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
T99 ON  Type 99 Decode ON  Indicates the Type 99 Decode feature is enabled. 
T99 OFF  Type 99 Decode OFF  Indicates the Type 99 Decode feature is disabled. 
PA ON  Public Address ON  Indicates that the public address function of the radio is enabled. 
PA OFF  Public Address OFF  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that public address function of the radio was disabled. 
ALRM ON  External Alarm Enabled  Indicates that the external alarm function of the radio is enabled. 
ALRM OFF  External Alarm 
Disabled  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that the external alarm function of the radio was disabled. 
NO KEY #  Encryption Key Missing  Flashing indicator indicates that no encryption key or an incorrect encryption key is 
programmed into the radio. 
BCKL=1-6  Backlight  Indicates the display intensity and keypad backlight level. 
GR  Group ID  Indicates that the call is a group call and is followed by the GID of the caller. 
MENU    Displayed when the menu key is pressed and remains displayed in line 1 until a menu item is 
selected. 
SYS=1-64  System = 1 - 64  The system number for the current base station of the system displayed in line 1. It is displayed 
in line 2 of the display. Press the system key to obtain this display. 
SEL PHN  Select Phone  After pressing the PHN key, selecting an entry from the phone list by typing the entry number 
will display this message on Line 1. 
Ggg-v.vv  Code Group and  
Revision Number  This is code group and revision number that is displayed in line 2 when the menu item 
“REVISION” is selected. The ‘gg’ is the group number of the software. The first ‘v’ is the 
hardware version and ‘vv’ is the revision of the software. 
NO ENTRY    Indicates that there is no data stored in one of the programmable items in either the phone list 
or individual call list. The user programmable items are items 1 through 10 in each list. 
INV SYS  Invalid System  Displayed when the current system is an invalid type. 
CHN=1-99  Channel = 1 - 99  Displayed on line 1 of the display. This is a conventional channel index displayed when the 
group key is pressed. 
FIX LIST  Fixed List  The Priority scan list is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete keys. 
FIXED P1  Fixed Priority 1  The Priority 1 scan channel is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete keys. 
(c) 2004    Displayed in line 2 when the message ‘M/A-COM’ is displayed in line 1 while displaying 
different items under the menu when “REVISION” is selected by the operator. 
EM  Emergency  Indicates an emergency has been declared by the LID that follows the display, “EM.” An 
example of this is “EM 01201.” 
*INDV*  Individual Call  Displayed in line 2 of the display when an individual call is in progress (trunked and T99 
modes only). 
*GROUP*  Group Call  Indicates a group call is in progress and is displayed on line 1 of the display (trunked and T99 
modes only). 
SPKR ON  External Speaker ON  Displayed when the external speaker is enabled. 
SPKR OFF  External Speaker OFF  Displayed when the external speaker is disabled. 
BANK=1-8    The bank of keys that are going to be loaded when the keyloader loads encryption keys. This is 
only valid for radios that support VGS, VGE, or DES encryption. It is displayed on line 2 of 
the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
KEY LOAD    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
KEY ZERO    Displayed on line 2 of the display when the reset and option buttons are pressed 
simultaneously for approximately two seconds. The encryption keys are zeroed. 
SYS KEY  System Key  Displayed on line 1 of the display in the display key mode of the menu. It is followed in the 
second line with a key number “KEY = <1..7>”. 
KEY=1-7    Displayed on line 2 of the display in the display key mode of the menu for conventional 
systems when the “SYS KEY” or “CHN KEY” is displayed in line 1 and for trunked systems 
when the “SYS KEY” or “GRP KEY” is displayed in line 1. 
PRIMARY    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the primary keys are enabled. 
PRS NAME  Personality Name  Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The personality 
name is displayed on line 2 at the same time. 

MM-014716-001 
77 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
M/A-COM    Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The copyright year 
is shown in line 2 of display at the same time “(c) 2007.” 
10.3 ALERT TONES 
The M7300 series mobile radio also provides audible alert tones or “beeps” to indicate the various 
operating conditions. These alert tones can be enabled or disabled through programming. 
Table 10-3: M7300 EDACS Mode Alert Tones 
NAME  TONE  DESCRIPTION 
Call Originate  A short mid-pitched tone.  Sounds after keying the radio (Push-To-Talk button is 
pressed). Indicates the radio has been assigned a 
working channel 
Carrier Control Timer  Five short high-pitched 
warning tones followed by a 
long low-pitched tone. 
Sounds if the programmed time for continuous 
transmission is exceeded. The transmitter will shut down 
shortly after the alert, interrupting communications. 
Release and re-key the PTT button to maintain 
communications. This will reset the carrier control timer 
and turn the transmitter back on. 
Key Press Alert  A short tone.  Indicates a key has been pressed. A short low-pitched 
tone indicates no action was taken because the key is 
not active in the current mode. 
10.4 MENU 
The menu function accesses features that are not available directly from the keypad. The order and 
specific number of menu items available is configurable through programming. Upon radio power up, the 
menu item at the beginning of the menu list will always be displayed first. Subsequent access to the menu 
function will return the last menu item that was shown in the display. To enter the menu mode, press 
MENU. The   ramp control, MENU, and CLR are used during the selection process. All of the 
selection mode rules previously detailed apply to the menu item selection process with the exception of 
direct access. The radio will continue to receive and transmit normally while in the menu function. 
A new item is displayed by using the   ramp control to scroll through the list in increasing and 
decreasing order. The displayed menu item is made active by pressing MENU. 
After entering the menu selection mode, the following generic display format will appear. 
M E N U 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Line 1 indicates the radio is in the menu selection mode. Line 2 indicates the menu item (YYYYYYYY) 
that is to be viewed or changed (some menu items provide radio information and do not have changeable 
parameters). 
An example of the menu item selection process and menu item parameter change is detailed below for the 
contrast menu item. 
1. Press MENU to enter the menu mode. 
2. Press the   ramp control until the display shows: 

MM-014716-001 
78 
M E N U 
CONTRAST 
3. Press MENU. The contrast menu item is activated and the display will be similar to the following: 
CNTRST  =  X 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 
Line 1 shows the active menu item and its current parameter setting (XXX). Line 2 shows the 
currently selected system or group name (YYYYYYYY). 
4. The menu item's parameter setting shown in the display can now be changed by using the   
ramp control to scroll through the list of parameter values. Once the desired setting is reached, press 
MENU to store the value and return to the normal display. For menu items that display radio 
information, use   to scroll through a list of informational displays. The menu items are listed in 
Table 9-4. 
Table 10-4: Menu Item Information 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Contrast Adjust 
Menu Item:  
CONTRAST 
Once selected: 
 CNTRST= 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8  Selects the Contrast level. 
Radio Revision 
Information  Menu item: 
 REVISION 
Informational  
displays only  
(see radio); no user  
selectable settings. 
Selects the information display to view. 
Phone Call 
Menu item:  
PHN CALL 
Once selected:  See 
Telephone Interconnect  
Call Section 
  Allows access to the Phone Call Feature. 
External Alarm  Menu Item:  EXTALARM  
Once Selected:  
EXTALARM ON, OFF  EXTALARM replaces the system name on the 
display as long as the external alarm feature is 
enabled. 
Public 
Address 
Menu item:  
PUB ADDR  
Once selected:  
PA ON or  
PA OFF 
ON, OFF  Public Address is toggled ON and OFF. 
External Speaker 
Menu item:  
EXT SPKR 
Once selected: 
SPKR ON or 
SPKR OFF 
ON, OFF  External Speaker is toggled ON and OFF. 
Encryption Key 
Loading 
Menu item: KEYLOAD  
Once selected:  
KEY LOAD BANK = N Up to 8 banks of  7 keys  Enables the radio to accept the loading of encryption 
keys. 
Display Current 
Encryption 
Key(s) 
Menu item: DISP KEY 
Once selected:  
SYS KEY, GRP KEY or 
CHN KEY and KEY = N 
  Displays current encryption key number. 
Front Panel 
Squelch Adjust 
Menu item: 
SQUELCH 
Once selected: 
SQLCH=xx 
1-16  Allows setting of squelch. 
Scan  Menu item: SCAN ON, OFF  Toggles scan function ON or OFF. 

MM-014716-001 
79 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Scan Add  Menu item: SCAN ADD 
Once selected: Proper scan 
icon displayed.  S, 2 or 1  Adds group or channel to scan list. 
Scan Delete  Menu item: SCAN DEL 
Once selected: Scan icon 
goes out.    Deletes group or channel from scan list. 
Scan Add/Delete  Menu item: SCAN A/D 
When selected: Toggles 
through scan selections 
Toggle sequence 
S, 2, 1, S, ...  Changes present group or channel to next scan 
choice in scan list. 
Last Scanned 
Channel Recall 
Menu Item: SCAN ADD 
Press twice when actively 
receiving; three times when 
not receiving. Scan icon 
displayed. 
 Changes the selected channel to the last scanned 
channel. 
Home channel 
selection 
Menu item: HOME 
Once selected: Home group 
or channel displayed.   Changes to the group or channel defined for Home 
function. 
System select  Menu item: SYS SEL 
Once selected: SYS = n 1-64 = (n)umber of desired 
system  Displays the system selected. 
External alarm #2 Menu item: EXTALRM2 ON, OFF  Toggles external alarm #2 feature ON or OFF. 
System selection 
Menu item: SYSGRP 1 
Menu item: SYSGRP 2 
Menu item: SYSGRP 3 
Menu item: SYSGRP 4 
Menu item: SYSGRP 5 
 Changes to the System & Group/Channel 
programmed for SYSGRP 1-5. 
Mute  Menu item: MUTE ON, OFF  Toggles the mute function ON or OFF to control the 
audio output from the selected radio. 
Mute #1  Menu item: MUTE 1 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 1 function ON or OFF on radio 
#1. 
Mute #2  Menu item: MUTE 2 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 2 function ON or OFF on radio 
#2. 
Multiple radio 
operation  Menu item: RADIO ON, OFF  Toggles the currently selected radio. 
Menu item: RADIO 1 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #1. 
Radio selection  Menu item: RADIO 2 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #2. 
Talkaround 
feature 
Menu item: TALKARND 
Once selected: 
TALKARND on line 1  ON, OFF  Toggles talkaround ON or OFF (transmit frequency 
changed to receive frequency). 
Channel selection  Menu item: CHN SEL 
Once selected: CHN = n 1-99 = (n)umber of desired 
channel  Displays the conventional channel selected. 
Feature 
Encryption 
Display 
Menu Item: FEATURES 
Once selected: 
See Feature Encryption 
Display section 
Informational displays only; 
no user selectable settings 
Indicates current features program- med into the 
radio as well as certain information required to add 
features to the radio (refer to the Table of Contents 
for Feature Encryption Display. 
Type 99 Decode 
Enable 
Menu Item: T99 ENAB 
Once selected: 
T99 ON or T99 OFF ON, OFF  Type 99 Decode is toggled ON and OFF. 
System Scan 
Enable 
Menu Item: SYS SCAN 
Once selected: SYSC ON 
or SYSC OFF ON, OFF  System Scan features like ProScan are toggled ON 
and OFF. 
10.5 RECEIVING A CALL 
1. Turn the radio on by rotating the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob clockwise (out of detent). A 
short alert signal (if enabled through programming) indicates the radio is ready to use. 
2. Adjust the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob to the desired volume level. 
3. Select the desired conventional system and channel. The display indicates the current conventional 
system and channel names. 

MM-014716-001 
80 
4. The radio is now ready to receive calls. 
5. When the radio receives a call (and the correct encoding is decoded, if programmed and enabled), it 
unmutes on the channel and the BSY indicator comes on. 
10.6  SENDING A CALL 
1. Turn ON the radio and set the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME knob to the desired volume level. 
Select the desired conventional system and channel. 
2. Ensure that the channel is not busy by pressing the CLR button to briefly disable any channel 
decoding and unmute the receiver or observe the unlit BSY indicator. If the Channel Busy Lockout 
feature is programmed for the selected channel, the radio will not transmit when the channel is busy. 
3. Press and hold the PTT button. The TX indicator will turn on and a short beep sounds (if 
programmed) indicating that communication can begin. 
4. Hold the microphone approximately three inches from the mouth and speak in a normal voice. 
5. Release the PTT button when the transmission is complete and listen for a reply. 
10.7 EMERGENCY OPERATION 
If enabled, G-STAR emergency signaling can be transmitted when operating in the conventional mode. 
This G-STAR signaling will transmit 5 times with a delay between each transmission. To send an 
emergency call on the selected conventional system and channel (or on an optionally pre-programmed 
conventional emergency system and channel), proceed as follows: 
Press and hold the red Emergency button for approximately one second (this time is programmable and, 
therefore, could be longer or shorter; check with the system administrator). The radio turns on the TX 
indicator and proceeds to transmit the pre-programmed G-STAR emergency signaling sequence. 
G-STAR is programmed to transmit in one of the following methods:  
METHOD 1:  G-STAR is transmitted on the selected channel. If the channel is changed the emergency
signaling will continue to be transmitted on the newly selected channel.  
METHOD 2:  Same as METHOD 1 but the radio will lock on to the currently selected channel. Any
attempts to change the system or channel will be disabled.  
METHOD 3:  G-STAR is transmitted on a pre-programmed conventional emergency system and 
channel regardless of the selected channel. In this case the selected channel is available 
for voice transmission and the radio will periodically change to the pre-programmed 
emergency system and channel to send the emergency signaling and then change back to
the selected channel.  
METHOD 4:  Same as METHOD 3 but the radio will lock on to the pre-programmed emergency 
system and channel. Any attempts to change the system or channel will be disabled.  
The emergency state can be cleared by turning the radio OFF and then back ON. 
10.7.1 Using 5-Tone Signaling to Declare an Emergency 
If 5-Tone signaling is defined for emergency declaration in place of G-STAR emergency signaling, a pre-
programmed tone sequence will be transmitted instead of the G-STAR sequence. This emergency 
declaration functions as the G-STAR emergency in all other respects. 

MM-014716-001 
81 
10.7.2 Tone Encode Transmission 
In conventional mode, two keys can be defined to be tone encode triggers. If either one of the pre-
programmed tone encode triggers is pressed, a pre-programmed tone sequence will be transmitted on the 
current system and channel. (See Section 10.7 if the emergency key is used.) The TX indicator will light 
during tone transmission and a beep will sound at the end of the transmission. If enabled, audible side 
tones will be heard in the radio speaker as well. If PTT is pre-programmed as one of the triggers, the 
microphone will become active for voice communication after the tone sequence is complete. 
Tone encode will be transmitted with Channel Guard if one is defined, and tones are always transmitted in 
clear voice mode, even if the channel is set for digital or private (see VOICE MODES). Digital or private 
voice transmission will resume normally after the tone transmission. 
10.8  SCANNING CONVENTIONAL CHANNELS 
Channels, which have been previously added to the scan list on a per system basis, can be scanned. The 
selected channel is scanned (if enabled through programming) whether or not it is in the scan list. Each 
conventional system's channel scan list is retained in memory when the radio is turned OFF. 
The scan rate will vary depending upon the number of channels in the scan list and whether or not the 
radio is programmed to scan for channels with decoding enabled. Fewer channels will result in a faster 
scan rate. If programmed for dual-priority scan operation, the priority-one, priority-two and the remaining 
scan list channels are scanned. Once a signal is detected and the correct encoded squelch signal is 
decoded (if programmed), the radio receives the message and displays the received scan channel. At the 
same time, scanning continues on the priority-one and priority-two channels. If a priority-one or priority-
two channel carrier, regardless of encoded squelch decoding, is detected while a non-priority channel is 
being received, the display name is updated and the received channel is switched to the priority channel. 
Scanning of the priority-one channel will continue if a message is being received on the priority-two 
channel. 
While receiving a call on a non-priority or a priority two channel, the radio periodically checks the 
priority one and two channels. If Scan with Channel Guard is enabled, the radio will use Channel Guard 
to decide whether to unmute on a priority channel. The radio will stop, on squelch detection, on a priority 
channel. In normal operation, the radio will unmute only on detecting the correct Channel Guard; 
otherwise, it will remain muted until the priority channel call and hang time have ended. An optional 
feature allows the radio to continue scanning upon the detection of the wrong Channel Guard on a priority 
channel. The user can then select the rate at which this channel is scanned until the call ends. 
10.8.1 Adding Channels to a Scan List 
1. With scan operation turned OFF, select the desired channel to add to the selected conventional system 
channel scan list. 
2. Press (+) or (-) with   to display the current scan status on line 1 of the display for a time-out 
period.  
3. While current scan status is displayed, press (+) to add the channel to the scan list.   is displayed. 
This sets the selected channel for non-priority scanning.  
4. Press (+) again to set the channel for Priority 2 (P2) scanning and   is displayed.  

MM-014716-001 
82 
5. A third press of (+) sets the channel for Priority 1 (P1) scanning and   is displayed on line 1. If the 
P1 or P2 channels are already set and a new channel is then assigned as the P1 or P2 channel, the 
previously assigned priority channel will change to non-priority scanning. The priority setting 
selection sequence is set and stops at P1, therefore the channel must be deleted from the scan list by 
pressing (-) before the channel is set to a previous priority setting. Any channel that is in a system's 
channel scan list will show  ,  , or   when it is the selected channel. 
10.8.2 Deleting Channels From A Scan List 
1. With scan operation turned OFF select the desired channel to delete from the selected conventional 
system's channel scan list. 
2. Press (+) or (-) with  . The current status is displayed for a time-out period. Press - with 
 to delete the channel from the scan list.  ,  , or   will turn OFF. 
10.8.3 Nuisance Delete 
A channel can also be deleted from the scan list, if it is not the currently selected channel, by pressing 
down with   twice during scan operation while the radio is displaying the unwanted channel. The 
channel will be deleted from the conventional system's channel scan list in the same manner as if done 
using the steps above. Deletions done in this manner will not remain deleted if the radio is turned OFF 
and then back ON. 
10.9 TURNING SCAN ON 
1. Toggle the scan operation ON by pressing SCAN. The SCAN indicator will turn ON when the radio 
is scanning. 
Scanning will stop while the microphone is off-hook if the hookswitch feature is enabled 
through programming. 
2. When a channel on the scan list receives a channel assignment, the radio unmutes on the assigned 
channel, BSY indicator comes ON and the received scan channel is displayed. 
• The radio will continue scanning if a new channel is selected when scan is ON. 
• Pressing the PTT button when scan is ON will cause the radio to transmit on the displayed 
channel or to the currently selected channel depending on programming. 
• Pressing (+) with   when scan is ON causes the radio to recall the scanned channel that 
was last received. This channel is recalled for a period equal to the scan hang time. 
10.10 TURNING  SCAN  OFF 
Toggle the scan operation OFF by pressing SCAN. The radio will resume operation on the selected 
channel. 

MM-014716-001 
83 
10.11 SQUELCH  ADJUST 
In the conventional mode of operation, the squelch can be re-adjusted in the MENU selection mode or 
from a front panel key on the keypad that has been pre-programmed. A default value of 9, or any user 
level between 1 and 16, can be selected using programming software. The user can change this setting 
either of two ways from the front panel keys. 
A value of 16 requires a strong signal to open squelch, a value of 2 requires a very weak 
signal to open squelch, and a value of 1 is open squelch. 
When the squelch adjust feature is activated, Channel Guard, T99 decode, and Scan are 
disabled. When the squelch adjust feature is exited, Channel Guard, T99 decode, and 
Scan are restored to their previous states. 
10.11.1 Menu Selection 
1. Press the MENU key and then use the RAMP control   to scroll through the selections until 
SQUELCH is displayed. Then press MENU (select) again. 
2. The display will show SQLCH=xx, where "xx" is the value between 1 and 16. 
3. Use the RAMP control   to scroll through the values. Then press the MENU (select) key to 
save the new value after the display time-out (2 seconds). The displayed value will be selected and 
saved. 
4. If the MENU or CLR key is pressed before the time-out, the menu feature will exit and the squelch 
level will not be updated. The original value will be restored. 
10.11.2  Pre-Programmed Keypad Key 
1. Press the pre-programmed key and the display will indicate SQLCH=xx, where "xx" is the value 
between 1 and 16. 
2. Use the RAMP control   to scroll through the values. Then press MENU to save the new value 
or wait for the display time-out (2 seconds). The displayed value will be selected and saved. 
3. If the CLR key is pressed before the time-out, the squelch level will not be updated and the original 
value will be restored. 
10.12 TYPE  99  DECODE 
If the Type 99 Decode Option has been pre-programmed, individual selective calling is possible. The 
radio can now decode individual, group or supergroup paging calls. Two sets of Type 99 paging codes 
must be pre-programmed into the radio. When the radio decodes an appropriate Type 99 code sequence, 
an alert tone and visual indicator is provided to the user. The receiver then operates as a noise squelched 
unit until Type 99 is reset. Type 99 decode continues to operate during this noise squelched period. The 
appropriate Type 99 alert tone will sound again if it detects a valid two-tone sequence. 
Type 99 operation can be reset manually or automatically (pre-programmed). Manual reset is achieved by 
briefly pressing CLR, if programmed. Automatic reset, if enabled, occurs after a 30 second interval 
following the most recent decode of a Type 99 tone sequence. Hookswitch (pre-programmed) can also 

MM-014716-001 
84 
enable or disable Type 99 decode. The pre-programmed key light will blink when Type 99 is disabled by 
the hookswitch. 
Type 99 decode will continue to be active while the radio's CLR button is pressed. This allows the user to 
monitor calls and still be alerted when a call is directed to the user. While the user continues to press 
CLR, the user will hear both calls and all Type 99 tone signals. If CLR is pressed for longer than two (2) 
seconds, Type 99 decode will either be disabled or re-enabled depending upon its present state. 
To check the Type 99 enable status, press the Scan Add/Delete   ramp control. The current status 
of Type 99 decode will be displayed for a time-out period.  
If a Horn Alert Option is installed and enabled with the Type 99 Decode Option, the radio can beep the 
vehicle horn when a Type 99 call is received. This option permits alerting persons out of the vehicle when 
a call is received. 
Type 99 is automatically disabled when Scan is enabled. 
10.12.1 Menu Selection 
Press MENU and then use the   ramp control to scroll through the selections until T99 ENAB is 
displayed. Then press MENU to toggle the Type 99 decode state. The T99 ON or T99 OFF display 
message is displayed for two seconds to show the new state. 
10.12.2  Pre-Programmed Keypad Key 
Press the pre-programmed key and the T99 ON or T99 OFF display message is displayed for two 
seconds to show the new state. 
10.13 DIRECT  MODE  OPERATION 
The direct mode (or talk-around) provides short range, line of sight communications. One of the buttons 
on the control unit must be pre-programmed for this feature to function. 
1. Make sure the radio is ON and then select the desired conventional system and channel. 
2. Press the pre-programmed button to toggle the talk-around function ON. 
3. Ensure that the channel is not busy by pressing the CLR (System version) or CLEAR (Scan version) 
to briefly disable any channel decoding and unmute the receiver or observe the unlit BSY indicator. If 
the Channel Busy Lockout feature is programmed for the selected channel, the radio will not transmit 
when the channel is busy. 
4. Press and hold the PTT button. The TX indicator will light and a short beep sounds (if pre-
programmed) indicating that communication can begin. 
5. Release the PTT button when the transmission is complete and listen for a reply. 
6. When the communications is completed, press the pre-programmed button to toggle the talk-around 
function OFF. 

MM-014716-001 
85 
11  P25 CONVENTIONAL OPERATION 
11.1  RADIO STATUS ICONS 
Status icons are indicators that show the various operating characteristics of the radio.  The icons appear 
on the first line of the display. 
Figure 11-1: Typical Display 
Table 11-1: Icons and Descriptions 
ICON  DESCRIPTION 
 Indicates selected group or channel is in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 1 in scan list. 
 Indicates selected group or channel is programmed as Priority 2 in scan list. 
 Indicates a conventional channel enabled with Channel Guard Function. 
 Transmitting or receiving in encrypted mode. 
 Indicates the current channel is set up as an analog channel. 
 Indicates the current channel is set up as a ProVoice channel. 
 Scan mode enabled.  
 Indicates the current channel is set up as a Project 25 (P25) channel. 

MM-014716-001 
86 
11.2 MESSAGES 
During radio operation, various messages are displayed on either line 1 or line 2. Typical messages 
include control channel status information, such as system busy or call denied, or messages associated 
with the radio's operation, (i.e. volume adjust). These messages are described as follows: 
Table 11-2: Display Messages 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
TALKARND  Talk-around  Indicates the radio is operating on conventional channels in talk-around mode (no repeater). 
VOL=31  Volume Level  Indicates the current volume level. The volume level display ranges from OFF (silent) to 31 
(loudest). 
UNKNOWN  Caller's ID Not 
Received  Indicates that an individual call is being received, but the caller's ID was not received. 
T99 ON  Type 99 Decode ON  Indicates the Type 99 Decode feature is enabled. 
T99 OFF  Type 99 Decode OFF  Indicates the Type 99 Decode feature is disabled. 
PA ON  Public Address ON  Indicates that the public address function of the radio is enabled. 
PA OFF  Public Address OFF  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that public address function of the radio was disabled. 
ALRM ON  External Alarm Enabled  Indicates that the external alarm function of the radio is enabled. 
ALRM OFF  External Alarm 
Disabled  Momentary (2 seconds) indicates that the external alarm function of the radio was disabled. 
PVT DIS  Private Mode Disabled  Indicates  that  private mode is disabled or no encryption key has been programmed for the 
selected group/channel or special call. 
FRCD PVT  Forced Private 
Operation  Indicates that forced private operation has been pre-programmed into radio. 
NO KEY #  Encryption Key Missing  Flashing indicator indicates that no encryption key or an incorrect encryption key is 
programmed into the radio. 
BCKL=1-6  Backlight  Indicates the display intensity and keypad backlight level. 
GR  Group ID  Indicates that the call is a group call and is followed by the GID of the caller. 
WHC=1  Who Has Called  This display indicates the number from the Who Has Called list. Individual calls received but 
not responded to are stored in a Who Has Called list. This list is accessible by pressing the # 
key and then the INDV key after the Individual call has timed out or the Clear button is 
pressed. This display is on line 2 and the LID of the caller is displayed on the top line. 
Currently the list is not implemented and the display will always be WHC=1. 
PHONE  Phone Call  Displayed when a phone call is received from the site. It is displayed in line 1 of the display. 
Line 2 of the display will contain the display *INDV* when line 1 contains this message. The 
radio interprets a received phone call as an individual call. 
MENU    Displayed when the menu key is pressed and remains displayed in line 1 until a menu item is 
selected. 
SYS=1-64  System = 1 - 64  The system number for the current base station of the system displayed in line 1. It is displayed 
in line 2 of the display. Press the system key to obtain this display. 
INDV=1-99  Individual = 1 - 99  Indicates which item in the individual call list is being displayed. It is displayed in line 2 of the 
display. The name or ID of the item in the list is displayed in line 1 of the display. 
PHN=1-99  Phone = 1 - 99  Indicates which item in the phone list is being displayed. It is displayed in line 2 of the display. 
Line 1 of the display will be the last 3 characters of the list item contents. 
SEL PHN  Select Phone  After pressing the PHN key, selecting an entry from the phone list by typing the entry number 
will display this message on Line 1. 
Ggg-v.vv  Code Group and  
Revision Number  This is code group and revision number that is displayed in line 2 when the menu item 
“REVISION” is selected. The ‘gg’ is the group number of the software. The first ‘v’ is the 
hardware version and ‘vv’ is the revision of the software. 
*PHONE*  Phone Call  Displayed when an initiated phone call is in progress. This is displayed on line 2 of the display. 
NO ENTRY    Indicates that there is no data stored in one of the programmable items in either the phone list 
or individual call list. The user programmable items are items 1 through 10 in each list. 
INV SYS  Invalid System  Displayed when the current system is an invalid type. 

MM-014716-001 
87 
MESSAGE  NAME  DESCRIPTION 
CHN=1-99  Channel = 1 - 99  Displayed on line 1 of the display. This is a conventional channel index displayed when the 
group key is pressed. 
FIX LIST  Fixed List  The Priority scan list is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete keys. 
FIXED P1  Fixed Priority 1  The Priority 1 scan channel is fixed and cannot be changed using the add or delete keys. 
(c) 2004    Displayed in line 2 when the message ‘M/A-COM’ is displayed in line 1 while displaying 
different items under the menu when “REVISION” is selected by the operator. 
EM  Emergency  Indicates an emergency has been declared by the LID that follows the display, “EM.” An 
example of this is “EM 01201.” 
*INDV*  Individual Call  Displayed in line 2 of the display when an individual call is in progress (trunked and T99 
modes only). 
*GROUP*  Group Call  Indicates a group call is in progress and is displayed on line 1 of the display (trunked and T99 
modes only). 
SPKR ON  External Speaker ON  Displayed when the external speaker is enabled. 
SPKR OFF  External Speaker OFF  Displayed when the external speaker is disabled. 
BANK=1-8    The bank of keys that are going to be loaded when the keyloader loads encryption keys. This is 
only valid for radios that support VGS, VGE, or DES encryption. It is displayed on line 2 of 
the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
KEY LOAD    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the encryption keyloader is connected. 
KEY ZERO    Displayed on line 2 of the display when the reset and option buttons are pressed 
simultaneously for approximately two seconds. The encryption keys are zeroed. 
SYS KEY  System Key  Displayed on line 1 of the display in the display key mode of the menu. It is followed in the 
second line with a key number “KEY = <1..7>”. 
KEY=1-7    Displayed on line 2 of the display in the display key mode of the menu for conventional 
systems when the “SYS KEY” or “CHN KEY” is displayed in line 1 and for trunked systems 
when the “SYS KEY” or “GRP KEY” is displayed in line 1. 
PRIMARY    Displayed on line 1 of the display when the primary keys are enabled. 
PRS NAME  Personality Name  Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The personality 
name is displayed on line 2 at the same time. 
M/A-COM    Displayed on line 1 of the display under the revision selection of the menu. The copyright year 
is shown in line 2 of display at the same time “(c) 2007.” 
11.3 ALERT TONES 
The M7300 series mobile radio also provides audible alert tones or “beeps” to indicate the various 
operating conditions. These alert tones can be enabled or disabled through programming. 
Table 11-3: M7300 EDACS Mode Alert Tones 
NAME  TONE  DESCRIPTION 
Call Originate  A short mid-pitched tone.  Sounds after keying the radio (Push-To-Talk button is 
pressed). Indicates the radio has been assigned a 
working channel 
Carrier Control Timer  Five short high-pitched 
warning tones followed by a 
long low-pitched tone. 
Sounds if the programmed time for continuous 
transmission is exceeded. The transmitter will shut down 
shortly after the alert, interrupting communications. 
Release and re-key the PTT button to maintain 
communications. This will reset the carrier control timer 
and turn the transmitter back on. 
Key Press Alert  A short tone.  Indicates a key has been pressed. A short low-pitched 
tone indicates no action was taken because the key is 
not active in the current mode. 

MM-014716-001 
88 
11.4 MENU 
The menu function accesses features that are not available directly from the keypad. The order and 
specific number of menu items available is configurable through programming. Upon radio power up, the 
menu item at the beginning of the menu list will always be displayed first. Subsequent access to the menu 
function will return the last menu item that was shown in the display. To enter the menu mode, press 
MENU. The   ramp control, MENU, and CLR are used during the selection process. All of the 
selection mode rules previously detailed apply to the menu item selection process with the exception of 
direct access. The radio will continue to receive and transmit normally while in the menu function. 
A new item is displayed by using the   ramp control to scroll through the list in increasing and 
decreasing order. The displayed menu item is made active by pressing MENU. 
After entering the menu selection mode, the following generic display format will appear. 
M E N U 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Line 1 indicates the radio is in the menu selection mode. Line 2 indicates the menu item (YYYYYYYY) 
that is to be viewed or changed (some menu items provide radio information and do not have changeable 
parameters). 
An example of the menu item selection process and menu item parameter change is detailed below for the 
contrast menu item. 
1. Press MENU to enter the menu mode. 
2. Press the   ramp control until the display shows: 
M E N U 
CONTRAST 
3. Press MENU. The contrast menu item is activated and the display will be similar to the following: 
CNTRST  =  X 
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 
Line 1 shows the active menu item and its current parameter setting (XXX). Line 2 shows the 
currently selected system or group name (YYYYYYYY). 
4. The menu item's parameter setting shown in the display can now be changed by using the   
ramp control to scroll through the list of parameter values. Once the desired setting is reached, press 
MENU to store the value and return to the normal display. For menu items that display radio 
information, use   to scroll through a list of informational displays. The menu items are listed in 
Table 9-4. 
Table 11-4: Menu Item Information 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Contrast Adjust 
Menu Item:  
CONTRAST 
Once selected: 
 CNTRST= 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8  Selects the Contrast level. 

MM-014716-001 
89 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Radio Revision 
Information  Menu item: 
REVISION 
Informational displays only 
(see radio); no user 
selectable settings.  Selects the information display to view. 
Phone Call 
Menu item:  
PHN CALL 
Once selected:  See 
Telephone Interconnect  
Call Section 
  Allows access to the Phone Call Feature. 
External Alarm  Menu Item:  EXTALARM 
Once Selected:  
EXTALARM ON, OFF  EXTALARM replaces the system name on the 
display as long as the external alarm feature is 
enabled. 
Public Address 
Menu item:  
PUB ADDR  
Once selected:  
PA ON or  
PA OFF 
ON, OFF  Public Address is toggled ON and OFF. 
External Speaker 
Menu item:  
EXT SPKR 
Once selected: 
SPKR ON or 
SPKR OFF 
ON, OFF  External Speaker is toggled ON and OFF. 
Encryption Key 
Loading 
Menu item: KEYLOAD  
Once selected:  
KEY LOAD BANK = N Up to 8 banks of  7 keys  Enables the radio to accept the loading of encryption 
keys. 
Display Current 
Encryption 
Key(s) 
Menu item: DISP KEY 
Once selected:  
 SYS KEY, GRP KEY or 
CHN KEY and KEY = N 
  Displays current encryption key number. 
Scan  Menu item: SCAN ON, OFF  Toggles scan function ON or OFF. 
Private Mode  Menu Item: PRIVATE 
Once selected: PVT or key 
light.  ON, OFF  Toggles private function ON or OFF. 
Front Panel 
Squelch Adjust 
Menu Item: SQUELCH 
Once selected: 
SQLCH=xx 1-16  Allows setting of squelch. 
Scan Add  Menu item: SCAN ADD 
Once selected: Proper scan 
icon displayed.  S, 2 or 1  Adds group or channel to scan list. 
Scan Delete  Menu item: SCAN DEL 
Once selected: Scan icon 
goes out.    Deletes channel from scan list. 
Scan Add/Delete  Menu item: SCAN A/D 
When selected: Toggles 
through scan selections 
Toggle sequence 
S, 2, 1, S, ...  Changes present group or channel to next scan 
choice in scan list. 
Last Scanned 
Channel Recall 
Menu Item: SCAN ADD 
Press twice when actively 
receiving; three times when 
not receiving. Scan icon 
displayed. 
 Changes the selected channel to the last scanned 
channel. 
Home channel 
selection 
Menu item: HOME 
Once selected: Home group 
or channel displayed.   Changes to the group or channel defined for Home 
function. 
System select  Menu item: SYS SEL 
Once selected: SYS = n 1-64 = (n)umber of desired 
system  Displays the system selected. 
External alarm #2 Menu item: EXTALRM2 ON, OFF  Toggles external alarm #2 feature ON or OFF. 
System and 
Channel selection 
Menu item: SYSGRP 1 
Menu item: SYSGRP 2 
Menu item: SYSGRP 3 
Menu item: SYSGRP 4 
Menu item: SYSGRP 5 
 Changes to the System & Channel programmed for 
SYSGRP 1-5. 

MM-014716-001 
90 
FEATURE  DISPLAY  PARAMETER 
SETTINGS  COMMENT 
Mute  Menu item: MUTE ON, OFF  Toggles the mute function ON or OFF to control the 
audio output from the selected radio. 
Mute #1  Menu item: MUTE 1 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 1 function ON or OFF on radio 
#1. 
Mute #2  Menu item: MUTE 2 ON, OFF  Toggles the mute 2 function ON or OFF on radio 
#2. 
Multiple radio 
operation  Menu item: RADIO ON, OFF  Toggles the currently selected radio. 
Menu item: RADIO 1 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #1. 
Radio selection  Menu item: RADIO 2 ON, OFF  Changes to radio #2. 
Talkaround 
feature 
Menu item: TALKARND 
Once selected: 
TALKARND on line 1  ON, OFF  Toggles talkaround ON or OFF (transmit frequency 
changed to receive frequency). 
Feature 
Encryption 
Display 
Menu Item: FEATURES 
Once selected: 
See Feature Encryption 
Display section 
Informational displays only; 
no user selectable settings 
Indicates current features program- med into the 
radio as well as certain information required to add 
features to the radio (refer to the Table of Contents 
for Feature Encryption Display. 
System Scan 
Enable 
Menu Item: SYS SCAN 
Once selected: SYSC ON 
or SYSC OFF ON, OFF  System Scan features like ProScan are toggled ON 
and OFF. 
Type 99 Decode 
Enable 
Menu Item: T99 ENAB 
Once selected: 
T99 ON or T99 OFF ON, OFF  Type 99 Decode is toggled ON and OFF. 
11.5  GROUP CALLS IN P25 MODE 
11.5.1 Transmitting a Group Call 
1. Select the desired P25 system.  
2. Select the Talk Group/Conventional Channel. (Selected simultaneously using either the 
system/group/channel knob or the group key.) 
3. Press and hold the PTT. 
4. When a grant tone is received (if enabled through programming), speak into the microphone. 
5. Release PTT and wait for response. 
11.5.2 Receiving a Group Call 
The radio will unmute according to the squelch mode defined in the radio personality (monitor, normal, 
selective). 
1. Select the desired P25 system and Talk Group/Channel or turn scan on and make sure the desired 
channel is in the scan list. 
2. When the radio receives a P25 call, the radio will unmute and the channel name will appear in the 
display. 
3. Press the PTT button to respond. 

MM-014716-001 
91 
11.6  INDIVIDUAL CALLS IN P25 MODE 
11.6.1 Transmitting an Individual Call 
1. Select the desired P25 system.  
2. Select the radio unit to call (callee source ID) from the pre-programmed individual call list or enter 
the ID number on the radio keypad. 
3. Press and hold the PTT. 
4. When grant tone is received (if enabled through programming) speak into the microphone. 
5. Release the PTT. 
11.6.2 Receiving an Individual Call 
The radio will unmute according to the squelch mode defined in the radio personality (monitor, normal, 
selective). 
1. Select the desired P25 system and Talk Group/Channel or turn scan on and make sure the desired 
channel is in the scan list. 
2. When the radio receives a P25 call, the radio will unmute and the ID of the transmitting radio will 
appear in the display. 
3. Press the PTT button to respond. 
Unanswered calls will appear in the Who Has Called (WHC) list. 
11.7 EMERGENCY GROUP CALLS IN P25 MODE 
There is no method available for a system-wide Emergency clear. An emergency group call 
must be cleared on each individual radio. 
11.7.1 Declaring an Emergency Group Call 
1. Select the desired P25 system and Talk Group/Channel. 
2. Press the red emergency button on the top of the radio. The radio will broadcast a short emergency 
transmission with the emergency bit set. “TXEMER” will appear in the display of the transmitting 
radio. 
3. To send a voice message, press the PTT and speak into the microphone. 
4. To clear an emergency from the transmitting radio, perform one of the following steps: 
a. Change systems. 
b. Change channels (if not prohibited by programming). 
c. Cycle power by turning radio off and then back on. 
d. Press the Clear and Emergency buttons simultaneously, providing the Clear Emergency option is 
enabled in the Supervisory Options in the personality. 

MM-014716-001 
92 
11.7.2 Receiving an Emergency Group Call 
1. Select the desired P25 System and Talk Group/Channel. 
2. When the radio detects an incoming Emergency Group Call, the radio will sound an alert tone and 
“RXEMER” will appear in the display. 
3. Voice or emergency transmissions will be heard at the receiving radio. 
4. To clear an emergency from the receiving radio, perform one of the following steps: 
a. Change systems. 
b. Change channels (if not prohibited by programming). 
c. Cycle power by turning radio off and then back on.  
d. Press the Clear and Emergency buttons simultaneously, providing the Clear Emergency option is 
enabled in the Supervisory Options in the personality. 

MM-014716-001 
93 
12 BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING 
If the radio is not operating properly, check Table 12-1 for likely causes. For additional assistance, 
contact a qualified service technician. 
Table 12-1: Basic Troubleshooting 
SYMPTOM  CAUSE  SOLUTION 
Radio will not turn on.  No power.  Test the connection to the vehicle power 
supply. 
Radio will not turn off.  If in multiple control head 
configuration, one of the attached 
control heads is still powered up.  Power off all control heads. 
Radio will not register 
or does not receive 
provisioning data.  Bad logon credentials.  Check logon and password. 
No audio.  Speaker volume is muted.  Increase the volume level. 
Poor audio.  Transmitting or receiving in a 
poor coverage area or subject to 
interference. 
Check network connectivity and move to a 
better coverage area if possible. Report the 
area without coverage to an authorized 
network technician. 
Poor display visibility.  Ambient Light Sensor is 
obstructed.  Clear the obstruction and give the sensor a 
clear path to ambient light. 
No network 
connectivity icon in 
display. 
Radio is out-of-range or cannot 
connect with the OpenSky 
network. 
Base station network connection 
has failed. 
Return to coverage area if possible and 
wait for condition to clear. 
Use single-site trunking or switch to an 
alternate channel. 
Radio will not 
transmit.  Radio may be out of coverage 
area or may be overheated. 
Return to coverage area if possible. If 
overheated, let radio cool before retrying 
transmission. Report this failure to an 
authorized technician. 
“Warning: No MRU” 
Message. 
Radio control head is unable to 
communicate with mobile radio 
unit (radio transceiver). 
Have the radio connections checked by an 
authorized technician. 
Control head 
randomly changes 
display. 
In multiple control head 
configurations, another user is 
operating the radio from another 
control head. 
None 
Encrypted calls cannot 
be made.  Not authorized to use.  Contact system administrator to request 
encryption privileges. 
Screen displays: 
UNAUTH3 
The radio network ID has not 
been added to the network.  Contact system administrator. 
Screen displays: 
NOAUTHV 
Radio authentication of the 
VNIC failed.  Contact system administrator. 

MM-014716-001 
94 
SYMPTOM  CAUSE  SOLUTION 
Screen displays: 
NOAUTHM 
VNIC authentication of the radio 
failed.  Contact system administrator. 
Screen displays: 
NOSUPRT 
The voice authentication security 
policy is set to only allow 
authenticated users.  Contact system administrator. 
Encrypted calls cannot 
be made.  User not logged in.  Log in (refer to Section 7.14.1). 

MM-014716-001 
95 
13 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE 
The Technical Assistance Center's (TAC) resources are available to help with overall system operation, 
maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is the point of contact when answers are needed to 
technical questions. 
Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance and repair provide 
technical support via a toll-free (in North American) telephone number. Support is also available through 
mail, fax and e-mail.  
For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or call the 
Technical Assistance Center at: 
North America:   1-800-528-7711 
International:   1-434-385-2400 
Fax:   1-434-455-6712 
E-mail:     tac@tycoelectronics.com 

MM-014716-001 
96 
14 KEYPAD REMAPPING 
If the keys have been remapped to provide new functions, fill in the following template for future reference. 
Button Function Button Function 
Emergency   1   
Preset A   2   
Preset B   3   
Preset C   4   
Rocker •  5   
Rocker ••  6   
Rocker +  7   
Rocker -  8   
MENU   9   
OPT/OPTION   *   
CLR/CLEAR   0   
SCAN   #   

MM-014716-001 
97 
15 RADIO SETUP 
RADIO TYPE: 
FREQUENCY BAND: 
OPERATOR'S NAME: 
EMERGENCY GROUP:  
SYSTEM NUMBER  SYSTEM NAME  TRK/CNV  GRP/CHN NUMBER  GRP/CHN NAME  USE 

MM-014716-001 
98 
SYSTEM NUMBER  SYSTEM NAME  TRK/CNV  GRP/CHN NUMBER  GRP/CHN NAME  USE 

MM-014716-001 
99 
SYSTEM NUMBER  SYSTEM NAME  TRK/CNV  GRP/CHN NUMBER  GRP/CHN NAME  USE 

MM-014716-001 
100 
SYSTEM NUMBER  SYSTEM NAME  TRK/CNV  GRP/CHN NUMBER  GRP/CHN NAME  USE 

MM-014716-001 
101 
16 WARRANTY 
A.  M/A-COM, Inc. (hereinafter "Seller") warrants to the original purchaser for use (hereinafter "Buyer") that Equipment manufactured 
by or for the Seller shall be free from defects in material and workmanship, and shall conform to its published specifications. With 
respect to all non-M/A-COM Equipment, Seller gives no warranty, and only the warranty, if any, given by the manufacturer shall 
apply.  Rechargeable batteries are excluded from this warranty but are warranted under a separate Rechargeable Battery 
Warranty (ECR-7048). 
B.  Seller’s obligations set forth in Paragraph C below shall apply only to failures to meet the above warranties occurring within the 
following periods of time from date of sale to the Buyer and are conditioned on Buyer’s giving written notice to Seller within thirty 
(30) days of such occurrence: 
1.  for fuses and non-rechargeable batteries, operable on arrival only. 
2.  for parts and accessories (except as noted in B.1) sold by Seller’s Service Parts Operation, ninety (90) days. 
3.  for P7200, P7100IP, P5400, P5300, P5200, P5100, P3300, PANTHER™ 405P and 605P, M7300, M7200 (including V-TAC), 
M7100 IP, M5300 and M3300 radios, two (2) years. 
4.  for all other equipment of Seller’s manufacture, one (1) year. 
C.  If any Equipment fails to meet the foregoing warranties, Seller shall correct the failure at its option (i) by repairing any defective or 
damaged part or parts thereof, (ii) by making available at Seller’s factory any necessary repaired or replacement parts, or (iii) by 
replacing the failed Equipment with equivalent new or refurbished Equipment. Any repaired or replacement part furnished 
hereunder shall be warranted for the remainder of the warranty period of the Equipment in which it is installed. Where such 
failure cannot be corrected by Seller’s reasonable efforts, the parties will negotiate an equitable adjustment in price. Labor to 
perform warranty service will be provided at no charge during the warranty period only for the Equipment covered under 
Paragraph B.3 and B.4. To be eligible for no-charge labor, service must be performed at a M/A-COM factory, by an Authorized 
Service Center (ASC) or other Servicer approved for these purposes either at its place of business during normal business hours, 
for mobile or personal equipment, or at the Buyer’s location, for fixed location equipment. Service on fixed location equipment 
more than thirty (30) miles from the Service Center or other approved Servicer’s place of business will include a charge for 
transportation. 
D.  Seller’s obligations under Paragraph C shall not apply to any Equipment, or part thereof, which (i) has been modified or otherwise 
altered other than pursuant to Seller’s written instructions or written approval or, (ii) is normally consumed in operation or, (iii) has 
a normal life inherently shorter than the warranty periods specified in Paragraph B, or (iv) is not properly stored, installed, used, 
maintained or repaired, or, (v) has been subjected to any other kind of misuse or detrimental exposure, or has been involved in 
an accident. 
E.  The preceding paragraphs set forth the exclusive remedies for claims based upon defects in or nonconformity of the Equipment, 
whether the claim is in contract, warranty, tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise, and however instituted. Upon the 
expiration of the warranty period, all such liability shall terminate. The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other 
warranties, whether oral, written, expressed, implied or statutory. NO IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OF 
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL APPLY. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE 
LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES. 
This warranty applies only within the United States. 
M/A-COM, Inc.      M/A-COM, Inc. 
1011 Pawtucket Blvd.      221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 
Lowell, MA  01853          Lynchburg, VA 24501 
1-877-OPENSKY      1-800-528-7711 
ECR-7047E 

MM-014716-001 
102 
This page intentionally left blank. 

Tyco Electronics Wireless Systems Segment 
221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 
Lynchburg, Virginia 24501 
(Outside USA, 1-434-385-2400) Toll Free 1-800-528-7711 
www.macom-wireless.com          Printed in U.S.A. 

Installation and Product Safety Manual 
MM-014763-001 
May/08 
M/A-COM 
M7300 
700 and 800 MHz 
Dual-Band Half-Duplex 
Front and Remote-Mount Mobile Radios 
with CH-721 Scan and System 
Control Heads 

MM-014763-001 
2 
MANUAL REVISION HISTORY 
REV.  DATE  REASON FOR CHANGE 
-  May/08  PRELIMINARY manual (5/27/2008). 
M/A-COM Technical Publications would particularly appreciate feedback on any errors found in this document and 
suggestions on how the document could be improved. Submit your comments and suggestions to: 
Tyco Electronics Wireless Systems Segment 
M/A-COM, Inc.  or fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 
Technical Publications 
221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway  or e-mail us at: techpubs@tycoelectronics.com 
Lynchburg, VA 24501 
CREDITS 
OpenSky and EDACS are registered trademarks of M/A-COM, Inc. 
ProVoice is a trademark of M/A-COM, Inc. 
AMBE and IMBE are registered trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. 
Bird is a registered trademark of Bird Electronic Corporation. 
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 
SmartSiren is a registered trademark of Federal Signal Corporation. 
All other brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. 
NOTICE 
This device is made under license under one or more of the following U.S. Patents:  4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 
5,185,796; 5,271,017; 5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,497; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. 
The voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, 
copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this technology is explicitly prohibited from 
attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into 
human-readable form. 
This manual covers M/A-COM products manufactured and sold by M/A-COM, Inc. 
Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any 
repairs, alterations or substitution of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the 
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer’s warranty. 
The software contained in this device is copyrighted by M/A-COM, Inc. Unpublished rights are reserved under the copyright 
laws of the United States. 
This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC.  Do not dispose of this product in a 
public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. 
This manual is published by M/A-COM, Inc. without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors,
inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by M/A-COM, Inc., at any time and without notice. Such 
changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of M/A-COM, Inc.
Copyright© 2008, M/A-COM, Inc. All rights reserved. 

MM-014763-001 
3 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
1 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION....................................................................................6 
1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS.................................................................................................6 
1.2 RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR FCC 
OCCUPATIONAL USE REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................ 6 
1.2.1 Federal Communications Commission Regulations...............................................................7 
1.3 COMPLIANCE WITH RF EXPOSURE STANDARDS...................................................................... 7 
1.3.1 Mobile Antennas ....................................................................................................................8 
1.3.2 Approved Accessories............................................................................................................8 
1.3.3 Contact Information................................................................................................................9 
1.4 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES AND SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION .............9 
1.5 COMMON HAZARDS ........................................................................................................................9 
1.6 SAFE DRIVING RECOMMENDATIONS........................................................................................10 
1.7 OPERATING RULES AND REGULATIONS ..................................................................................10 
1.8 OPERATING TIPS............................................................................................................................. 11 
2 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................................................12 
2.1 GENERAL..........................................................................................................................................12 
2.2 TRANSCEIVER.................................................................................................................................12 
2.3 REGULATORY .................................................................................................................................13 
3 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................14 
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................................14 
3.2 RELATED PUBLICATIONS.............................................................................................................16 
3.3 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................................................................................................................16 
3.4 CONTACTING M/A-COM FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .......................................................16 
4 UNPACKING AND CHECKING THE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................17 
4.1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................................................17 
4.2 MATERIAL INSPECTION................................................................................................................ 20 
5 PLANNING THE INSTALLATION.........................................................................................................21 
5.1 GENERAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................................21 
5.2 TOOLS REQUIRED...........................................................................................................................21 
5.3 LOCATING COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................24 
6 ANTENNA INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................25 
6.1 ANTENNA MOUNTING LOCATIONS ...........................................................................................25 
6.1.1 Direct Center or Center-Rear of Rooftop .............................................................................26 
6.1.2 Center of Trunk Lid..............................................................................................................26 
6.2 ANTENNA INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................................................26 
6.2.1 Install the Mobile Antenna ...................................................................................................26 
6.2.2 Install the GPS Antenna  (Required Only if Radio has GPS Receiver Option).................... 27 
7 FRONT-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION...........................................................................................29 
7.1 MOUNTING THE FRONT-MOUNT RADIO ................................................................................... 29 
7.1.1 Mounting Bracket Installation ..............................................................................................30 
7.1.2 Inserting the Radio into the Mounting Bracket ....................................................................32 
7.2 FRONT-MOUNT RADIO’S DC POWER INSTALLATION............................................................32 
7.2.1 Overview of On/Off Power Wiring Configurations ............................................................. 32 
7.2.2 DC Power Cable and Main Fuse Holder Installation............................................................33 
8 REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION.......................................................................................36 
8.1 MOUNTING THE REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO................................................................................36 

MM-014763-001 
4 
TABLE OF CONTENTS  Page 
8.1.1 Mounting Bracket Installation ..............................................................................................36 
8.1.2 Inserting the Radio into the Mounting Bracket.....................................................................40 
8.2 REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO’S DC POWER INSTALLATION.........................................................40 
8.2.1 Overview of On/Off Power Wiring Configurations..............................................................40 
8.2.2 DC Power Cable and Main Fuse Holder Installation............................................................41 
8.3 CONTROL HEAD INSTALLATION ................................................................................................43 
8.3.1 General Information..............................................................................................................43 
8.3.2 Control Head Mechanical Installation ..................................................................................46 
8.3.3 Control Head-to-Radio CAN Cable Connections.................................................................47 
8.3.4 Control Head Power Cable Installation ................................................................................49 
9 SPEAKER INSTALLATION.....................................................................................................................53 
9.1 FRONT-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION.....................................................................................53 
9.2 REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION .................................................................................53 
10 MICROPHONE ATTACHMENT.............................................................................................................54 
11 OPTIONAL CABLES.................................................................................................................................55 
11.1 M5300/M7300 OPTION CABLE CA-012349-001 ............................................................................55 
11.2 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CABLE CA-013671 ..............................................................................58 
11.3 CH-721 OPTION CABLE CA-011854-001........................................................................................59 
11.4 CH-721 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CABLE CA-104861.................................................................60 
12 GPS NMEA-FORMATTED SERIAL DATA CONNECTION...............................................................61 
13 INITIAL POWER-UP TEST......................................................................................................................62 
14 PERFORMANCE TESTS...........................................................................................................................63 
14.1 CHANGING OPERATING MODE FOR TESTS...............................................................................63 
14.1.1 Changing from OpenSky to Conventional............................................................................63 
14.1.2 Changing from Conventional to OpenSky............................................................................64 
14.2 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................64 
14.3 TRANSMITTING INTO A DUMMY LOAD.....................................................................................65 
14.4 TRANSMITTING INTO THE MOBILE ANTENNA........................................................................66 
14.5 TEST PERFORMANCE DATA FORM.............................................................................................69 
15 COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION........................................................................................................70 
16 WARRANTY ...............................................................................................................................................71 
(Continued) 

MM-014763-001 
5 
FIGURES 
Page 
Figure 5-1:  Typical Front-Mount Mobile Radio Installation in a Standard Passenger Vehicle ..........................22 
Figure 5-2:  Typical Remote-Mount Mobile Radio Installation in a Standard Passenger Vehicle....................... 22 
Figure 5-3:  M7300 Front-Mount and Remote-Mount Mobile Radios — Front and Rear Views........................ 23 
Figure 6-1:  Recommended Antenna Mounting Locations with Antenna Part Numbers.....................................25 
Figure 6-2:  Crimping Instructions for TNC RF Connector .................................................................................27 
Figure 7-1:  Front-Mount Mounting Bracket Kit KT101533V1 ..........................................................................30 
Figure 7-2:  Mounting Bracket FM101319V1 (Marked KTB0310) Dimensions [for Front-Mount M7300 
Mobile Radio (Radio Not Shown)].............................................................................................. 31 
Figure 8-1:  Remote-Mount Radio Dimensions ...................................................................................................37 
Figure 8-2:  Remote-Mount Mounting Bracket Kit KT23117 .............................................................................38 
Figure 8-3:  Mounting Bracket FM103111V1 Dimensions [for Remote-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio 
(Radio Not Shown)].....................................................................................................................39 
Figure 8-4:  CH-721 Scan Model Control Head Front Panel ...............................................................................44 
Figure 8-5:  CH-721 System Model Control Head Front Panel ...........................................................................44 
Figure 8-6:  CH-721 Rear Panel (both control head models)............................................................................... 45 
Figure 8-7:  Standard U-Shaped Control Head Mounting Bracket (Kit Part Number KT-008608)..................... 46 
Figure 8-8:  Optional Control Head Mounting Pedestal (Part Number MACDOS0012).....................................46 
Figure 8-9:  CAN Link Connections for a Single Control Head Installation .......................................................48 
Figure 8-10:  Typical CAN Link Connections for a Multi-Control Head Installation .........................................48 
Figure 10-1:  Attaching the Microphone to the CH-721Control Head................................................................. 54 
Figure 11-1:  M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001...............................................................................55 
Figure 11-2:  Programming Cables CA-013671-010 and -020 ............................................................................58 
Figure 11-3:  CH-721 Option Cable CA-011854-001..........................................................................................59 
Figure 11-4:  Programming Cable CA-104861 ....................................................................................................60 
Figure 14-1:  Wattmeter Connections for Antenna System Tests ........................................................................65 
TABLES 
Page 
Table 1-1: Recommended Minimum Safe Lateral Distance from Transmitting Antenna......................................8 
Table 4-1:  Installation Kit MAMW-NZN6W for Front-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio.......................................17 
Table 4-2:  Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R for Remote-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio with CH-721 
Control Head................................................................................................................................18 
Table 4-3:  Additional Options and Accessories for M7300 Mobile Radios ....................................................... 18 
Table 4-4:  Additional Options and Accessories for CH-721 Control Heads.......................................................20 
Table 11-1:  M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 Interconnections.....................................................56 
Table 14-1:  Required Test Equipment ................................................................................................................64 

MM-014763-001 
6 
1  REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 
1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS 
The following conventions are used in this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions that must 
be observed during all phases of operation, installation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to 
comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere violates safety standards of design, 
manufacture, and intended use of the product. M/A-COM, Inc. assumes no liability for the customer's 
failure to comply with these standards. 
The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, 
if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not 
proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully 
understood or met. 
CAUTION  
The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, 
which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in damage to the 
equipment or severely degrade equipment performance. 
The  NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve 
system performance or clarify a process or procedure. 
1.2  RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AWARENESS AND CONTROL 
INFORMATION FOR FCC OCCUPATIONAL USE REQUIREMENTS 
Before using the two-way mobile radio, read this important RF energy awareness and control 
information and operational instructions to ensure compliance with RF exposure guidelines. 
This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users 
have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their 
exposure to remain below RF exposure limits. This radio is NOT authorized for 
general population, consumer, or any other use. 
CAUTION  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by M/A-COM, Inc. could void the 
user's authority to operate the equipment. 
This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide 
communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses RF energy or radio waves to send and 
receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited 
to, electric power, sunlight, and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other 
forms of electromagnetic energy, which, when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high 
levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. 
Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop 
standards for exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for 

MM-014763-001 
7 
both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins 
of protection. All two-way radios marketed in North America are designed, manufactured, and tested to 
ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend 
specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they 
inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. Refer to the 
following websites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control exposure to 
assure compliance with established RF exposure limits: 
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html 
http://www.osha.gov./SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html 
1.2.1 Federal Communications Commission Regulations 
Before it was marketed in the United States, the M7300 two-way mobile radio was tested to ensure 
compliance with FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios. When two-way radios are 
used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control 
their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a 
label directing users to specific user awareness information. The radio has an RF exposure product label. 
Also, this Installation and Product Safety Manual and the applicable Operator’s Manual include 
information and operating instructions required to control RF exposure and to satisfy compliance 
requirements. 
1.3  COMPLIANCE WITH RF EXPOSURE STANDARDS 
The M7300 two-way mobile radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and 
international standards and guidelines regarding human exposure to RF electromagnetic energy. This 
radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure 
environment at duty-cycle times of up to 50% (50% transmit, 50% receive), and it is authorized by the 
FCC for occupational use. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure 
guidelines, the radio’s antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (talking), not 
when it is receiving (listening), or in a standby mode. 
The M7300 mobile two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and 
guidelines: 
• United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR 
§ 2 sub-part J. 
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 
C95.1-2005. 
• Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-2005. 
• IC Standard RSS-102, Issue 2, 2005: “Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio 
Standards Specification.  Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus 
(All Frequency Bands). 
CAUTION  
Table 1-1 lists the recommended minimum safe lateral distances for a controlled 
environment and for unaware bystanders in an uncontrolled environment, from 
transmitting antennas (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at rated radio 
power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Transmit only when unaware bystanders 
are at least the uncontrolled recommended minimum safe lateral distance away from 
the transmitting antenna. Based on the highest radiated RF power and with respect to 
the cables supplied with the antennas, the distances listed in Table 1-1 are considered 
as safe distances for controlled and uncontrolled environments for the listed antennas. 

MM-014763-001 
8 
Based on the highest radiated RF power and the highest antenna gain in antennas to be used with M7300, 
the following distances are considered as safe distances for controlled and uncontrolled environments 
with the M7300 mobile radio transmitting at a maximum 50% duty cycle: 
Table 1-1: Recommended Minimum Safe Lateral Distance from Transmitting Antenna 
RECOMMENDED MINIMUM LATERAL HUMAN BODY 
DISTANCE FROM TRANSMITTING ANTENNA 
ANTENNA 
PART NUMBER 
(Catalog Number)  ANTENNA DESCRIPTION  CONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(Centimeters) 
UNCONTROLLED 
ENVIRONMENT 
(Centimeters) 
AN-025167-001 
(Cat. No. MAMW-AN3J) 700/800 MHz Standard 
Rooftop-Mount; 3 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-002 
(Cat. No. MAMW-AN3K) 700/800 MHz Elevated-Feed 
Rooftop-Mount; 3 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-004 
(Cat. No. MAMW-AN3V) 700/800 MHz GPS Combo 
Rooftop-Mount; 3 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-005 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3W) 
700/800 MHz GPS Combo 
Elevated-Feed Rooftop-Mount; 
3 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-006 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3X) 700/800 MHz Magnetic-Mount; 
3 dBd Gain  29 72 
AN-025167-010 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5B) 700/800 MHz Low-Profile 
Rooftop-Mount; 2 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-011 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5C) 
700/800 MHz GPS Combo 
Low-Profile Rooftop-Mount; 
2 dBd Gain  28 69 
AN-025167-014 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5U) 700/800 MHz Standard 
Rooftop-Mount; 5 dBd Gain  39 87 
AN-025167-015 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5V) 700/800 MHz GPS Combo 
Rooftop-Mount; 5 dBd Gain  39 87 
1.3.1 Mobile Antennas 
The antenna(s) for the radio must be installed in accordance with Section 6 in this manual. Refer to Figure 
6-1 on page 25 for applicable antenna part numbers. Installation guidelines presented in Section 6 are 
limited to metal-body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. 
Use only the M/A-COM approved/supplied antenna(s) or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized 
antennas, modifications, or attachments can cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. 
1.3.2 Approved Accessories 
The radio has been tested and meets FCC RF guidelines when used with M/A-COM accessories supplied 
or designated for use with it. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with the FCC’s RF 
exposure guidelines, and may violate FCC regulations. For a list of approved accessories refer to Section 
4 in this manual (begins on page 17) and/or M/A-COM’s Products and Services Catalog. 

MM-014763-001 
9 
1.3.3 Contact Information 
For additional information on RF exposure and other information, contact M/A-COM using one of the 
contact links listed in Section 3.4 on page 16. 
1.4  OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES AND SAFETY TRAINING 
INFORMATION 
To ensure bodily exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the FCC allowable limits for 
occupational use. Always adhere to the following basic guidelines: 
1. The push-to-talk button should only be depressed when intending to send a voice message. 
2. The radio should only be used for necessary work-related communications. 
3. The radio should only be used by authorized and trained personnel. It should never be operated by 
children. 
4. Do not attempt any unauthorized modification to the radio. Changes or modifications to the radio may 
cause harmful interference and/or cause it to exceed FCC RF exposure limits. Only qualified 
personnel should service the radio. 
5. Always use M/A-COM authorized accessories (antennas, control heads, speakers/mics, etc.). Use of 
unauthorized accessories can cause the FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. 
The information listed above provides the user with information needed to make him or her aware of a RF 
exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC exposure limits of this radio. 
1.5 COMMON HAZARDS 
The operator of any mobile radio should be aware of certain hazards common to 
the operation of vehicular radio transmissions. Possible hazards include but are 
not limited to: 
• Explosive Atmospheres — Just as it is dangerous to fuel a vehicle while its motor running, be sure 
to turn the radio OFF while fueling the vehicle. If the radio is mounted in the trunk of the vehicle, 
DO NOT carry containers of fuel in the trunk. 
Areas with potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. Turn the radio 
OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that the 
radio or its accessories could generate sparks. 
• Interference To Vehicular Electronic Systems — Electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-
skid braking systems, electronic cruise control systems, etc., are typical of the types of electronic 
devices that can malfunction due to the lack of protection from radio frequency (RF) energy present 
when transmitting. If the vehicle contains such equipment, consult the dealer for the make of vehicle 
and enlist his aid in determining if such electronic circuits perform normally when the radio is 
transmitting. 
• Electric Blasting Caps — To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use 
two-way radios within 1000 feet (305 meters) of blasting operations. Always obey the “Turn Off 
Two-Way Radios” (or equivalent) signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA 
Standard: 1926.900). 

MM-014763-001 
10 
• Radio Frequency Energy — To prevent burns or related physical injury from radio frequency 
energy, do not operate the transmitter when anyone outside of the vehicle is within the minimum safe 
distance from the antenna as specified in Table 1-1. Refer to Section 1.2 for additional information. 
• Vehicles Powered By Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gas — Radio installation in vehicles powered by 
liquefied petroleum gas, where the LP gas container is located in the trunk or other sealed-off space 
within the interior of the vehicle, must conform to the National Fire Protection Association standard 
NFPA 58.  This requires: 
¾ The space containing the radio equipment must be isolated by a seal from the space containing 
the LP gas container and its fittings. 
¾ Outside filling connections must be used for the LP gas container. 
¾ The LP gas container space shall be vented to the outside of the vehicle. 
• Vehicles Equipped with Airbags — For driver and passenger safety, avoid mounting the radio’s 
control head (or any other component) above or near airbag deployment areas. In addition to driver-
side and passenger-side front-impact airbags, some vehicles may also be equipped with side-impact 
airbags. For occupant safety, verify the location of all airbags within the vehicle before installing the 
radio equipment. 
1.6  SAFE DRIVING RECOMMENDATIONS 
The American Automobile Association (AAA) advocates the following key safe driving recommenda-
tions: 
• Read the literature on the safe operation of the radio. 
• Keep both hands on the steering wheel and the microphone in its hanger whenever the vehicle is in 
motion. 
• Place calls only when the vehicle is stopped. 
• When talking from a moving vehicle is unavoidable, drive in the slower lane. Keep conversations 
brief. 
• If a conversation requires taking notes or complex thought, stop the vehicle in a safe place and 
continue the call. 
• Whenever using a mobile radio, exercise caution. 
1.7 OPERATING RULES AND REGULATIONS 
Two-way FM radio systems must be operated in accordance with the rules and regulations of the local, 
regional, or national government. 
In the United States, the M7300 mobile radio must be operated in accordance with the rules and 
regulations of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). Operators of two-way radio equipment, 
must be thoroughly familiar with the rules that apply to the particular type of radio operation. Following 
these rules helps eliminate confusion, assures the most efficient use of the existing radio channels, and 
results in a smoothly functioning radio network. 
When using a two-way radio, remember these rules: 
• It is a violation of FCC rules to interrupt any distress or emergency message. The radio operates in 
much the same way as a telephone “party line.” Therefore, always listen to make sure the channel is 
clear before transmitting. Emergency calls have priority over all other messages. If someone is 

MM-014763-001 
11 
sending an emergency message – such as reporting a fire or asking for help in an accident, do not 
transmit unless assistance can be offered. 
• The use of profane or obscene language is prohibited by Federal law. 
• It is against the law to send false call letters or false distress or emergency messages. The FCC 
requires keeping conversations brief and confine them to business. To save time, use coded messages 
whenever possible. 
• Using the radio to send personal messages (except in an emergency) is a violation of FCC rules. Send 
only essential messages. 
• It is against Federal law to repeat or otherwise make known anything overheard on the radio. 
Conversations between others sharing the channel must be regarded as confidential. 
• The FCC requires self-identification at certain specific times by means of call letters. Refer to the 
rules that apply to the particular type of operation for the proper procedure. 
• No changes or adjustments shall be made to the equipment except by an authorized or certified 
electronics technician. 
CAUTION  
Under U.S. law, operation of an unlicensed radio transmitter within the jurisdiction of 
the United States may be punishable by a fine of up to $10,000, imprisonment for up to 
two (2) years, or both. 
1.8 OPERATING TIPS 
The following conditions tend to reduce the effective range of two-way radios and should be avoided 
whenever possible: 
• Operating the radio in areas of low terrain, or while under power lines or bridges. 
• Obstructions such as mountains and buildings. 
In areas where transmission or reception is poor, communication improvement may 
sometimes be obtained by moving a few yards in another direction, or moving to a 
higher elevation. 

MM-014763-001 
12 
2 SPECIFICATIONS1 
2.1 GENERAL 
Dimensions, Front-Mount Mobile Radio:  2.4 x 6.9 x 11.3 inches (6.1 x 17.5 x 28.7 centimeters) 
(Height x Width x Depth)  (Includes knobs but not space required for mounting 
  bracket and cables at rear of radio) 
Dimensions, Remote-Mount Mobile Radio:  2.0 x 6.9 x 9.2 inches (5.1 x 17.5 x 23.4 centimeters) 
(Height x Width x Depth)  (Does not include space required for mounting bracket 
  and cables at rear of radio) 
Dimensions, Control Head:  2.4 x 6.9 x 3.9 inches (6 x 17.5 x 10 centimeters) 
(Height x Width x Depth)  (Does not include bracket and mounting screws) 
Weight, Front-Mount Mobile Radio:  5.9 pounds (2.68 kilograms), less bracket 
Weight, Remote-Mount Mobile Radio:  5.25 pounds (3.69 kilograms), less bracket 
Weight, Control Head:  1.25 pounds (0.57 kilograms), less bracket 
Operating Ambient Temperature Range:  -22 to +140° Fahrenheit (-30 to +60° Celsius) 
Storage Temperature Range:  -40 to +185° Fahrenheit (-40 to +85° Celsius) 
Altitude:  15,000 feet (4572 meters) maximum 
DC Supply Voltage Operating Range:  +13.6 Vdc ±10% (Normal range per TIA-603) 
DC Supply Current Requirements: 
  Receive (includes control head): 
    With Speaker Muted:  1.1 amps maximum 
    With 0.5-Watt Speaker Output Power:  1.5 amps maximum 
    With 10-Watt Speaker Output Power:  3.5 amps maximum 
    With 15-Watt Speaker Output Power:  4.0. amps maximum 
  Transmit (includes control head): 
    With 12-Watt RF Output Power:  8 amps maximum, 6 amps typical 
    With 30-Watt RF Output Power:  15 amps maximum, 12 amps typical 
Quiescent/Off Current: 
  Mobile Radio:  100 microamps maximum 
  Control Head:  100 microamps maximum 
2.2 TRANSCEIVER 
Frequency Ranges: 
 Receive: 
    700 MHz Narrow Bands:  764 to 767 MHz, 769 to 775 MHz and 773 to 776 MHz 
    800 MHz Band:  851 to 869 MHz 
 Transmit: 
    700 MHz Narrow Bands:  794 to 797 MHz, 799 to 805 MHz and 803 to 806 MHz 
    800 MHz Band:  806 to 824 MHz 
1 These specifications are primarily intended for the use of the installation technician. See the appropriate Specifications 
Sheet for the complete specifications. 

MM-014763-001 
13 
Transmit Output Power: 
  OpenSky Trunking Protocol (OTP) Mode:  15 watts 
  EDACS/ProVoice/Conventional Modes:  35 watts 
Channel Spacing:  12.5 kHz or 25 kHz (mode dependent) 
Voice and Data Communications Modes: Half-Duplex 
Frequency Stability:  ±1.5 ppm with AFC disabled; ±0.5 ppm with AFC 
Receiver Sensitivity: 
  700 MHz OTP Mode:  -111 dBm minimum at 1% BER (static) 
  800 MHz OTP Mode:  -111 dBm minimum at 1% BER (static) 
  700 MHz P25 Mode (TIA-102 Method):  -116 dBm minimum at 5% BER (static) 
  800 MHz P25 Mode (TIA-102 Method):  -116 dBm minimum at 5% BER (static) 
  700 MHz EDACS Mode:  -119 dBm minimum at 12 dB SINAD 
  800 MHz EDACS Mode:  -118 dBm minimum at 12 dB SINAD 
Receiver Intermodulation Rejection:  77 dB minimum at 12.5 kHz 
Audio Frequency Response:  300 to 3000 Hz 
Audio Output Power (Control Head):  15 watts RMS maximum into 4-ohm external speaker; 
1 watt into 4-ohm headset 
Voice-Coding Method: 
  OTP Mode:  Advanced Multi-Band Excitation (AMBE™) 
  EDACS, ProVoice and P25 Modes:  Improved Multi-Band Excitation (IMBE™) 
  P25 Phase 1 Mode:  Advanced Multi-Band Excitation Plus (AMBE+™) 
OpenSky Data Rate: 9.6 kbps 
OpenSky Compressed Voice 
Relative Data Rate: 2400 bps 
2.3 REGULATORY 
FCC Type Acceptance: OWDTR-0051-E 
Applicable FCC Rules:  Part 15 and Part 90 
Industry Canada Certification: 3636B-0051 
Applicable Industry Canada Rules: RSS-119 

MM-014763-001 
14 
3 INTRODUCTION 
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
The M7300 mobile radio is a high-performance dual-band digital mobile radio. Shown in Figure 5-3 on 
page 23, the M7300 radio provides standard and advanced mobile radio communication functions. It can 
operate with the following radio systems/standards: 
• 700 MHz and 800 MHz OpenSky trunked radio networks using the OpenSky Trunking Protocol 
(OTP); 
• 800 MHz Enhanced Digital Access Communications System (EDACS) trunked radio networks; 
• 800 MHz ProVoice trunked radio networks; 
• 800 MHz APCO Project 25 Phase I compliant Common Air Interface (P25 CAI) trunked radio 
networks; 
• 700 MHz talk-around communications in accordance with the APCO Project 25 Phase I standard; 
and, 
• Conventional FM repeater-based and FM talk-around voice communications in 700 and 800 MHz 
bands in accordance with the TIA/EIA-603 conventional land-mobile radio standard. 
The M7300 is designed to operate in a mobile environment, typically within a motor vehicle. It must be 
connected to an external transmit/receive antenna such as one mounted to the vehicle’s rooftop or trunk 
lid. In high-power mode, the radio’s 800 MHz RF transmit output power is rated at 15 watts maximum 
when operating in OpenSky mode, and 35 watts maximum when operating in an EDACS, conventional or 
P25 mode. Several different types of external-mount antennas are approved and available for use with the 
radio, as listed in Table 1-1 and Table 4-3. 
Front-mount and remote-mount configurations are available. In the front-mount configuration, the control 
head is an integral part of the mobile radio. In the remote-mount configuration of the M7300, the control 
head is located near the radio operator’s position and the radio is mounted remotely from the control head, 
typically in the vehicle’s trunk. The remote-mount radio is shown in Figure 5-3 on page 23. 
Control heads used with the M7300 radio include the CH-721 Scan and the CH-721 System model 
control heads. See Figure 8-4 (page 44) through Figure 8-6.  Both heads feature a large 3-line graphical 
vacuum-florescent display, front panel controls and buttons for user control of the mobile radio, an 
internal high-power audio amplifier to drive an externally-connected speaker, and a front panel 
microphone connector. The CH-721 System control head also has a 12-button numeric keypad that 
provides Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) functionality and easier operator system/group selection 
control at the control head’s front panel. 
The remote-mount M7300 radio is designed for remote mounting in a motor vehicle’s trunk, or some 
other preferably unoccupied section in a vehicle, such as a fire truck’s equipment shelf. Up to four (4) 
control heads can be connected to a front-mount M7300, and up to five (5) control heads can be 
connected to a remote-mount M7300. The radio is remotely controlled by a control head(s) connected to 
it via 3-wire Controller Area Network (CAN) cables. Between the radio and control head(s), the CAN 
link carries digitized microphone and speaker audio, controlling data such as button presses and radio 
messages, and user data such as that for a mobile data terminal connected to the serial port of the radio or 
control head. For proper operation, the CAN link must be terminated appropriately on each end. In 
multiple control head installations, two or more control heads are interconnected to the mobile radio in a 
series (“daisy-chain”) fashion via CAN link cables. 
As shown in Figure 8-6 on page 45, the CH-721 Scan and System model control heads used in remote-
mount radio installations have several connectors located on the head’s rear panel. These connectors 
include a DC power connector, two (2) CAN port connectors used for CAN link interconnections, an 

MM-014763-001 
15 
external speaker connector, a 9-pin serial port connector for connecting optional equipment such as a 
mobile data terminal, and a 25-pin accessory connector. Both CH-721 models can interface to an optional 
Federal Signal Electronic siren/light control system for broadcasting via a public address (PA) speaker.  
The radio must be powered by an external +13.6-volt (nominal) DC power source. In mobile applications, 
the motor vehicle’s electrical system is utilized as the source of DC power. In a remote-mount radio 
installation, the control head(s) connected to the radio is also powered by the same DC power source, but 
separately fused. When the control head is powered-up by the operator, it “wakes up” the radio by 
transmitting data to the radio via the CAN link. 
The radio provides half-duplex voice and data communications. Voice communications are accomplished 
via a “push-to-talk” (PTT) type microphone and a speaker connected to the control head. 
For data communications, the radio has an industry-standard 9-pin serial interface port for connecting 
optional data-type equipment, such as a Mobile Data Terminal (MDT), a laptop PC, an external display, 
or a key-entry device. This port works seamlessly with equipment from popular manufacturers and off-
the-shelf applications. OpenSky employs User Datagram Protocol over Internet Protocol (UDP/IP) data 
packet transfers, providing “plug and play” connectivity for data-type devices. 
700 MHz operating bands of the radio include the repeater output bands (mobile receive) from 764 to 
767 MHz, 769 to 775 MHz and 773 to 776 MHz, and the repeater input bands (mobile transmit) from 794 
to 797 MHz, 799 to 805 MHz and 803 to 806 MHz. 
800 MHz operating bands of the radio include 806 to 824 MHz repeater input band (mobile transmit) and 
the 851 to 869 MHz band used for repeater output and talk-around communications. 
The radio has an optional built-in Global Positioning System (GPS) tracking receiver. GPS provides 
quick and accurate unit location information to dispatchers via the radio network. The GPS receiver 
determines the unit’s location and the radio transmits it to the radio network. The GPS antenna can be 
integrated into the mobile transmit/receive antenna (i.e., a “combination” antenna). Alternately, the GPS 
antenna can be located/mounted completely separate from the mobile transmit/receive antenna. 
The radio and control head exceed tough environmental specifications included within military standard 
MIL-STD-810F, the radio industry standard TIA/EIA-603, and the radio standard established by the U.S. 
Forest Service. 
An M7300 radio operating on an OpenSky radio network uses Time-Division Multiple-Access (TDMA) 
digital modulation technology on the radio frequency link. TDMA allows multiple radio users to share a 
single RF channel. In addition, a single RF channel can support simultaneous digital voice and data 
communications. 
OpenSky employs Advanced Multi-Band Excitation (AMBE) speech and data compression technology 
developed by Digital Voice Systems, Inc.  When operating on an OpenSky radio network, AMBE gives 
an M7300 the ability to provide exceptional voice quality via the limited bandwidth of the radio 
frequency path, even when the received RF signal is weak (i.e., even in “fringe” areas). AMBE is 
performed by a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) integrated circuit within the radio programmed to perform 
an AMBE compression algorithm during mobile transmissions, and an AMBE expansion algorithm 
during mobile reception. 
Speech compression electronic circuitry—be it AMBE or another type such as IMBE—is sometimes 
referred to as “vocoding” circuitry for voice coding, or simply a “vocoder” circuit. 
Future M7300 radio upgrades will also support radio operation on 800 MHz APCO Project 25 phase I 
compliant Common Air Interface (P25 CAI) trunked radio networks, and operation in a talk-around mode 
in accordance with the APCO Project 25 phase I standard. P25 radio systems utilize Improved Multi-
Band Excitation Plus (IMBE) speech and data compression technology, also developed by Digital Voice 
Systems, Inc. 

MM-014763-001 
16 
This manual contains installation procedures for the M7300 mobile radio and the CH-721 control heads. 
The procedures cover the mounting and cabling of the equipment as well as the basic testing of the radio 
and control head. 
CAUTION  
M/A-COM recommends the buyer use only a M/A-COM authorized 
representative to install and service this product. The warranties provided to the 
buyer under the terms of sale shall be null and void if this product is installed or 
serviced improperly, and M/A-COM shall have no further obligation to the buyer for 
any damage caused to the product or to any person or personal property. 
3.2 RELATED PUBLICATIONS 
The following publications contain additional information about the M7300 mobile radio: 
• Quick Guide for OpenSky:  MM-014368-001 
• Operator’s Manual for OpenSky:  MM-014716-001 (available at www.macom-wireless.com via a 
Wireless Information Center login and Tech Link) 
• Maintenance Manual:  MM-014718-001 
3.3 REPLACEMENT PARTS 
Replacement parts can be ordered through M/A-COM’s Customer Resource Center. To order replacement 
parts through the Customer Resource Center, call, fax or email our ordering system: 
United States and Canada: 
• Phone Number:   1-800-368-3277 (toll free) 
• Fax Number:  1-800-833-7592 (toll free) 
• E-mail:  customerfocus@tycoelectronics.com 
International: 
• Phone Number:  1-434-455-6403 
• Fax Number:  1-434-455-6676 
• E-mail:  InternationalCustomerFocus@tycoelectronics.com 
3.4 CONTACTING M/A-COM FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE 
Should the mobile radio or control head require repair, or if there are questions or concerns about the 
installation of this equipment, contact M/A-COM’s Technical Assistance Center (TAC) using the 
following telephone numbers or email address: 
• U.S. and Canada:  1-800-528-7711 (toll free) 
• International: 1-434-385-2400 
• Fax: 1-434-455-6712 
• Email:  tac@tycoelectronics.com 

MM-014763-001 
17 
4  UNPACKING AND CHECKING THE EQUIPMENT 
4.1 MATERIALS 
A typical set of materials for a front-mount M7300 mobile radio installation includes: 
• M7300 Mobile Radio, part number RU-144750-061 
with: 
• CH-721 Scan Control Head, part number CU23218-0001 
or 
CH-721 System Control Head, part number CU23218-0003) 
• Standard Microphone, part number MC-101616-040 
• Installation Kit MAMW-NZN6W for Front-Mount M7300 (Contents listed in Table 4-1 below) 
• One or Two Antennas as listed in Table 4-3 (page 18) 
A typical set of materials for a remote-mount M7300 mobile radio installation includes: 
• M7300 Mobile Radio, part number RU-144750-061 
• CH-721 Scan Control Head, part number CU23218-0002 
or 
CH-721 System Control Head, part number CU23218-0004 
• Standard Microphone, part number MC-101616-040 
• Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R for Remote-Mount M7300 and CH-721 (Contents listed in 
Table 4-2) 
• One or Two Antennas as listed in Table 4-3 (page 18) 
Table 4-2 lists the contents of Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R available for a remote-mount M7300 
mobile radio installation. Table 4-3 on page 18 lists part numbers for radio-related options and 
accessories. Table 4-4 on page 20 lists options and accessories available for the CH-721 Scan and System 
model control heads. 
Table 4-1:  Installation Kit MAMW-NZN6W 
for Front-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio 
ITEM  QTY.  PART NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
1 1 KT101533V1 
Kit, Front-Mount Mounting Bracket. Includes M5300/M7100/-
M7300 Mounting Bracket FM101319V1 (marked KTB0310), M5 
stainless-steel hardware to attach radio to bracket, self-tapping 
hardware to attach bracket to mounting surface, ½-inch rubber 
grommet, and 7-inch cable ties. See Figure 7-1 on page 30. 
2 1 CA-012365-001 
Cable, M5300/M7300 DC Power. Includes 10-AWG, 20-Foot DC 
Power Cable with straight connector, (2) waterproof HFB fuse 
holders, (1) 15-amp AGC fuse and (1) 3-amp AGC fuse. 
3 2 CD-014027-001 Terminator, CAN; 3-Pin, Straight Body. 
4  1  LS102824V10  Speaker, External Mobile; 20-Watt (with 4.6-foot cable). 
5 1 CA-012349-001 Cable, M5300/M7300 Option. See Section 11.1 (page 55). 
6  1  FM-104859-001  Cap, Waterproof (For CH-721’s DB-9 serial port connector). 

MM-014763-001 
18 
Table 4-2:  Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R 
for Remote-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio with CH-721 Control Head 
ITEM  QTY.  PART NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
1 1  KT23117  Kit, Remote-Mount Mobile Radio Mounting Bracket. Includes 
M5300/M7100/M7300 Mounting Bracket FM103111V1 and 
M5 stainless-steel hardware to attach radio to bracket. See 
Figure 8-2 on page 38. 
2 1  KT-008608  Kit, CH-721 Mounting Bracket. Includes (1) U-Shaped 
Mounting Bracket and #8 stainless-steel hardware to attach 
control head to bracket. 
3 1  CA-012365-001 
Cable, M5300/M7300 DC Power. Includes 10-AWG, 20-Foot 
DC Power Cable with straight connector, (2) waterproof HFB 
fuse holders, (1) 15-amp AGC fuse and (1) 3-amp AGC 
fuse. 
4 1  CA-012616-001 
Cable, CH-721 DC Power. Includes 12-AWG, 10-foot DC 
Power Cable with straight connector, (2) waterproof HFB 
fuse holders, (1) 3-amp AGC fuse, and (1) 5-amp AGC fuse. 
5 2  CD-014027-001 Terminator, CAN; 3-Pin, Straight Body. 
6  1  CA-009562-030  Cable, CAN; 30 feet, Right-Angle-to-Straight Connectors. 
7  1  LS102824V10  Speaker, External Mobile; 20-Watt (with 4.6-foot cable). 
8 1 MAMROS0034-NN006 Cable, Speaker; 6-Inch, Straight Connector. 
9  1  FM-104859-001  Cap, Waterproof (For CH-721’s DB-9 serial port connector). 
10 1  FM-104859-002 
Cap, Waterproof (For CH-721’s DB-25 accessory 
connector). 
Table 4-3:  Additional Options and Accessories for M7300 Mobile Radios 
PART NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
AN-025167-001 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3J) Antenna, 700/800 MHz, Standard Rooftop-Mount, 3 dB Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors; Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-002 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3K) Antenna, 700/800 MHz, Elevated-Feed, Rooftop-Mount, 3 dB Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors; Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-004 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3V) Antenna, 700/800 MHz GPS Combo, Rooftop-Mount, 3 dB Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, 16.5-foot (5-meter) 
RG174/U (or equivalent) GPS RF Cable with Male SMA RF Connector 
(attached); 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias; Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-005 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3W) Antenna, 700/800 MHz GPS Combo, Elevated-Feed Rooftop-Mount, 
3 dBd Gain, NMO Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or 
equivalent) Low-Loss RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, 
16.5-foot (5-meter) RG174/U (or equivalent) GPS RF Cable with Male 
SMA RF Connector (attached); 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias; 
Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-006 
(Cat. No. MAMW-TBD) Antenna, 700/800 MHz, Magnetic-Mount, 3 dBd Gain, 15-foot (4.6-meter) 
RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF 
RF Connectors; Factory-Tuned 

MM-014763-001 
19 
Table 4-3:  Additional Options and Accessories for M7300 Mobile Radios 
PART NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
AN-025167-010 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5B) Antenna, 700/800 MHz, Low-Profile, Rooftop-Mount, 2 dBd Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-011 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5C) Antenna, 700/800 MHz GPS Combo, Low-Profile, Rooftop-Mount, 2 dBd 
Gain, NMO Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) 
Low-Loss RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, 16.5-foot 
(5-meter) RG174/U (or equivalent) GPS RF Cable with Male SMA RF 
Connector (attached); 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias; Factory-Tuned
AN-025167-014 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5U) Antenna, 700/800 MHz, Standard Rooftop-Mount, 5 dBd Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, Factory-Tuned 
AN-025167-015 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5V) Antenna, 700/800 MHz GPS Combo, Rooftop-Mount, 5 dBd Gain, NMO 
Mounting Base, 15-foot (4.6-meter) RG-58 A/U (or equivalent) Low-Loss 
RF Cable, Male TNC and Mini-UHF RF Connectors, 16.5-foot (5-meter) 
RG174/U (or equivalent) GPS RF Cable with Male SMA RF Connector 
(attached); 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias; Factory-Tuned 
AN-025187-001 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN5F) 
Antenna, GPS Receive Only, Roof-Mount, 17-foot (5.2-meter) RG174/U 
(or equivalent) RF Cable with Male SMA RF Connector (attached); 2.7 to 
3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias. 
AN-025187-003 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NAN3L) 
Antenna, GPS Receive Only, Magnetic-Mount, 17-foot (5.2-meter) 
RG174/U (or equivalent) RF Cable with Male SMA RF Connector 
(attached); 2.7 to 3.3 Vdc or 4.8 to 5.2 Vdc Bias. 
CA-012349-001  Cable, M5300/M7300 Option. See Section 11.1 (page 55). 
MAMROS0055  Cable, TIA/EIA-232 Serial Programming (6 feet). 
CN-014756  Connector, RF; TNC Male Crimp-Type for RG58U, RG58A/U and RGU400 
Coaxial Cable. 
KT-012350-001 
(Cat. No. MAMW-NMK5F) Kit, GPS Receiver for M5300/M7300. 
KT-014494-001  Kit, Remote-Mount to Front-Mount Conversion. 
CD-014027-001 Terminator, CAN; 3-Pin, Straight Body. 

MM-014763-001 
20 
Table 4-4:  Additional Options and Accessories for CH-721 Control Heads 
PART NUMBER  DESCRIPTION 
CA-009562-006  Cable, CAN; 6 feet, Right-Angle-to-Straight Connectors 
CA-009562-030  Cable, CAN; 30 feet, Right-Angle-to-Straight Connectors 
CA-009562-090  Cable, CAN; 90 feet, Right-Angle-to-Straight Connectors 
CA-009562-250  Cable, CAN; 250 feet, Right-Angle-to-Straight Connectors 
CA-011854-001  Cable, CH-721 Option 
CA-104861  Cable, CH-721 Programming 
MAMROS0075-N1210  Cable, DC Power; 12-AWG, 10-Foot, Straight Connector 
MAMROS0075-N1220  Cable, DC Power; 12-AWG, 20-Foot, Straight Connector 
MAMROS0075-R1210  Cable, DC Power; 12-AWG, 10-Foot, Right-Angle Connector 
MAMROS0075-R1220  Cable, DC Power; 12-AWG, 20-Foot, Right-Angle Connector 
MACDOS0012  Kit, Control Head Pedestal Mounting. Includes Pedestal Mount and 
Mounting Screws 
MACDOS0013-CN004 Kit, Speaker; 20-Watt, Straight Connector 
MACDOS0013-CR004 Kit, Speaker; 20-Watt, Right-Angle Connector 
MC-101616-040  Microphone, Standard with Conxall Flush-Mount Connector 
(Included with catalog number MAMW-NMC7Z) 
MC-103334-040  Microphone, DTMF with Conxall Flush-Mount Connector 
MC-103334-050 Microphone, Noise-Canceling with Conxall Flush-Mount Connector 
344A4678P1  Microphone Hanger. (Included with catalog number MAMW-NMC7Z) 
MACDOS0010 Terminator, CAN; 3-Pin, Right-Angle Body 
4.2 MATERIAL INSPECTION 
CAUTION  
After removal from the carton, examine the radio, control head and other components 
for broken, damaged, loose or missing parts. If any are noted, contact M/A-COM’s 
Customer Resource Center (see page 16) immediately to discuss and arrange the return 
of the equipment to M/A-COM for replacement. Any unauthorized attempts to repair or 
modify this equipment will void the warranty and could create a safety hazard. 
Upon removing items from the carton and verifying that all equipment is accounted for, proceed with the 
installation. 
CAUTION  
Mounting of the radio, control head, and/or antenna in ways other than those described 
in this manual may adversely affect performance, violate FCC rules on RF exposure, 
and even damage the unit, posing a potential safety hazard. 

MM-014763-001 
21 
5  PLANNING THE INSTALLATION 
5.1 GENERAL INFORMATION 
Figure 5-1 on page 22 illustrates a typical front-mount radio installation, and Figure 5-2 on page 22 
illustrates a typical remote-mount radio installation. Before starting, plan the installation carefully so it 
will meet the following requirements: 
• The installation is safe for the operator and passengers within the vehicle. 
• The equipment is installed away from the airbag deployment areas. 
• The installation allows for convenient access by the operator, as applicable (i.e., the control head). 
• The equipment is protected from water damage. 
• The installation is neat and allows easy service access. 
• The mobile radio is mounted in a location assuring the vehicle occupant’s safety and out of the way 
of passengers and auto mechanics. 
CAUTION  
A professional radio installer should perform the installation! 
5.2 TOOLS REQUIRED 
The following tools are recommended to complete the installation. Where specific vendor names and 
model or part numbers are given, equivalent substitutes may be used: 
• Non-Insulated Crimp Tool:  Thomas & Betts 
WT-111-M 
• Phillips-Head Screwdrivers, #1 and #2 
• Insulated Terminal Crimp Tool:  Klein 1005  • Flat-Blade Screwdrivers, #1 and #2 
• Fuse Holder Crimp Tool:  Thomas & Betts – 
WT-112M or California Terminal Products No. 
1250 or Channelock No. 909 
• 4-Millimeter Hex Key Wrench 
• 1/8-Inch Hex Key Wrench (Allen Wrench) 
• Ratcheting Coaxial Crimp Tool:  Cambridge 
24-9960P 
• Two 5/16-Inch Combination or Open-End 
Wrenches (Needed for GPS Receiver Option) 
• Non-Metallic Fish Tape, 25-Foot:  Klein-Lite 
50156 
• ¾-Inch Hole Saw with Depth Protection:  
Ripley HSK 19 or Antenex HS34 
• Various Socket and Driver Sets  • Clutch-Type Screw Cordless Gun/Drill with 
Driver Bits:  Makita #6096DWE 
• Soft-Jaw Pliers:  Tessco 450520 or equivalent  • Cordless Electric Drill with Bits 
• Various Fasteners (e.g., machine screws and 
nuts, Tek screws, etc.) 
• Deburring Tool (for  ⅜-inch and smaller holes) 
• Tie Wraps: 6-inches or larger  • Flush-Cut and Large Wire Cutters 
A separate list of test equipment is included in Section 14.2 on page 64. 

MM-014763-001 
22 
VEHICLE 
BATTERY
GROMMET
(MOUNTED IN FIREWALL)
SPEAKER
IN-LINE WATERPROOF FUSE 
HOLDER & AGC FUSE
(20-AMP FOR RADIO)
MOBILE 
ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
M7300 FRONT-MOUNT 
MOBILE RADIO
VEHICLE 
FUSE BOX
GPS ANTENNA CABLE
MOBILE ANTENNA CABLE
Figure 5-1:  Typical Front-Mount Mobile Radio Installation in a Standard Passenger Vehicle 
Figure 5-2:  Typical Remote-Mount Mobile Radio Installation in a Standard Passenger Vehicle 

MM-014763-001 
23 
  FRONT VIEWS 
  Front-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio    Remote-Mount M7300 Radio 
 (With Scan Control Head) 
  REAR VIEW 
  (Enlarged) 
Figure 5-3:  M7300 Front-Mount and Remote-Mount Mobile Radios — Front and Rear Views 
CAN Port Connectors
(2 places)
Antenna 
Connector 
(female TNC) 
DC Power Cable
(with 3-Pin Connector)
GPS Antenna Port
(optional)
44-Pin I/O 
Connector 
9-Pin Serial Port 
Connector 

MM-014763-001 
24 
5.3 LOCATING COMPONENTS 
Plan the mounting locations of all components (radio, control head, antenna, and cables) and determine 
the routes for all wiring and cables. Particularly consider the connection of the radio for planning 
purposes. 
• Determine the customer’s preferences, if any, for location of components. Comply with these 
preferences as long as they are consistent with safety recommendations and guidelines presented in 
this manual, and other generally accepted professional radio installation practices. 
• For a front-mount installation, the radio is typically located under the vehicle’s dash panel. However, 
it may be mounted above the dash, or at some other location per customer requirements, available 
space, and/or mounting surface strength. Radio and control head dimensions are listed in Section 2.1 
on page 12.  As noted in that section, these dimensions do not include space required at the rear of the 
radio for cables. Several inches of clearance space is required. 
• For a remote-mount radio installation, the radio is typically located in the motor vehicle’s trunk, or 
some other preferably unoccupied section in a vehicle, such as a fire truck’s equipment shelf, and the 
control head is typically located under the vehicle’s dash panel. Radio and control head dimensions 
are listed in Section 2.1 on page 12.  As noted in that section, these dimensions do not include space 
required at the rear of the radio and control head for cables. Several inches of clearance space is 
required at the back of the control head, and at least six (6) inches is recommended at the back of the 
radio. In addition, several inches of clearance space is required at each side of the radio for access to 
the screws that secure the radio to its mounting bracket. 
• When selecting a mounting location, verify sufficient clearance behind the radio can be maintained so 
cables will not be stressed, crushed, twisted, or bent at severe angles. This also applies to the control 
head in a remote-mount radio installation. Also, the front and sides of the units must have clearance 
for air circulation, access to mounting screws, mounting hardware, etc. 
• Verify the drilling of holes and the insertion of screws will not damage or interfere with any existing 
vehicle components (for example, a fuel tank, fuel lines, the transmission housing, etc.), or any 
existing vehicle wiring. 
• For antenna location and installation-related information, refer to Section 6. 
CAUTION  
The radio must be kept out of direct sunlight and away from heat sources. Adequate 
free-air ventilation must be provided to its rear fins. The radio will automatically 
reduce its transmit RF output power when its ambient temperature exceeds 
approximately +140° Fahrenheit (+60° Celsius). 
CAUTION  
All cables should have a service loop near each connector end. Do not bend the cables 
at severe angles near the connector end. Above all, after all components are installed, 
verify no cable is under any tension. Failure to do so may lead to damaged cables, 
causing intermittent radio operation or complete radio failure. 

MM-014763-001 
25 
6 ANTENNA INSTALLATION 
6.1 ANTENNA MOUNTING LOCATIONS 
At this time, review all information presented in the REGULATORY AND 
SAFETY INFORMATION section of this manual (see page 6). A transmitting 
antenna must be installed in accordance with the guidelines presented in the 
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION section. Use Table 1-1 on page 8 
and Figure 6-1 below as a guide for determining the best possible mounting 
configuration/location in order to reduce human exposure to radio frequency (RF) 
electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. 
Antennas must be mounted in one of three possible locations on the vehicle as described in the following 
subsections. Figure 6-1 shows the recommended locations and antenna part numbers for each location. 
Also, see Table 4-3 for additional information. Always follow the antenna manufacturer’s instructions 
when mounting an antenna. 
 TOP VIEW OF A TYPICAL VEHICLE 
 LOCATION(S) 
ANTENNA 
PART NO.*  ANTENNA DESCRIPTION  p o n 
 AN-025167-001  700/800 MHz Standard Rooftop-Mount, 3 dBd Gain  9  9 
 AN-025167-002  700/800 MHz Elevated-Feed Rooftop-Mount, 3 dBd Gain  9 9 9 
 AN-025167-004  700/800 MHz GPS Combo Rooftop-Mount, 3 dBd Gain  9  9 
 AN-025167-005  700/800 MHz GPS Combo Elevated-Feed Rooftop-Mount, 3 dBd Gain  9 9 9 
 AN-025167-006  700/800 MHz Magnetic-Mount, 3 dBd Gain  9   
 AN-025167-010  700/800 MHz Low-Profile Rooftop-Mount, 2 dBd Gain  9  9 
 AN-025167-011  700/800 MHz GPS Combo Low-Profile Rooftop-Mount, 2 dBd Gain  9 9 9 
 AN-025167-014  700/800 MHz Standard Rooftop-Mount, 5 dBd Gain    
9 
 AN-025167-015  700/800 MHz GPS Combo Rooftop-Mount, 5 dBd Gain    
9 
 AN-025187-001  GPS Receive Only, Roof-Mount  9 9  
 AN-025187-003  GPS Receive Only, Magnetic-Mount  9 9  
 * See Table 4-3 on page 18 for the respective antenna catalog numbers.     
Figure 6-1:  Recommended Antenna Mounting Locations with Antenna Part Numbers 

MM-014763-001 
26 
6.1.1  Direct Center or Center-Rear of Rooftop 
The center of the vehicle’s roof is the best location for a rooftop-mount antenna (location n in Figure 
6-1).  For optimal performance, the mounting area under the antenna must be a flat with a minimum 
radius of six (6) inches of metal ground plane. It must be located directly in the center of the roof to 
minimize human exposure to RF electromagnetic energy. Other obstructions such as a light bar or another 
antenna may prevent the antenna from being mounted in the direct center of the roof. In this case, the 
antenna should be mounted a minimum of one foot away from and behind the obstruction but in the 
middle of the roof with respect to the left and right sides of the vehicle (location o in Figure 6-1). 
6.1.2  Center of Trunk Lid 
Certain vehicles do not allow for the antenna to be placed in the center or center-rear of the roof. In this 
case, the next best location for the antenna is in the direct center of the trunk lid (location p in Figure 
6-1).  In this case, an elevated-feed-point antenna is recommended. Although this type of antenna does 
not require a metal ground plane, it must be located directly in the center of the trunk lid to minimize 
human exposure to RF electromagnetic energy. 
6.2  ANTENNA INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 
An antenna must be installed before completing the radio installation. 
6.2.1  Install the Mobile Antenna 
Table 4-3  (page 18) and Figure 6-1 (page 25) list the mobile radio antennas available for use with the 
radio. As presented in the previous section, various mounting locations exist. Optimal performance is 
achieved via a rooftop antenna mounted in the direct center of the motor vehicle’s roof. The following 
mobile antenna installation procedure is recommended: 
1. Once the mounting location is selected, refer to the antenna manufacturer’s mounting and testing 
instructions included with the antenna kit for installation guidance. Install the antenna in accordance 
with these instructions. If necessary, contact M/A-COM’s Technical Assistance Center. See page 16 
for TAC contact information. 
The antenna cable of M/A-COM approved antennas should never be cut to a 
shorter length. Instead, excess cable must be tied and stowed. This not only 
prevents the antenna from radiating above its intended or configured power, but 
it also allows for future installation considerations such as a relocation of the 
mobile radio within the vehicle. Installations requiring longer cables are treated 
as custom and separately specified. 
2. Route the cable from the antenna base to the location of where the mobile radio will be installed. 
Remove headliner panel, interior panels, etc., as necessary. The cable must be kept out of casual 
contact from persons within the vehicle. Tie and stow the cable as necessary to protect it from 
possible chafing. 
3. Using an appropriate crimp tool, crimp the supplied TNC RF connector to the end of the antenna 
cable. For crimping instructions, see Figure 6-2 or the instructions supplied with antenna. 

MM-014763-001 
27 
Actual Size; Dimensions are in Inches 
(VS-AN-025167-010 Rev. A) 
Figure 6-2:  Crimping Instructions for TNC RF Connector 
4. The antenna cable is connected to the radio’s TNC receptacle-type (female) RF connector per a 
procedure presented later in this manual. The cable and its TNC connector must be protected from 
damage, dirt, and/or metal shavings which may be generated during the mechanical and electrical 
installation of the radio. Temporarily tying the connector and cable-end within a small plastic bag is 
recommended. 
6.2.2  Install the GPS Antenna  
(Required Only if Radio has GPS Receiver Option) 
If the M7300 radio is equipped with the GPS receiver option, the GPS receiver requires connection to an 
externally-mounted GPS antenna. The GPS antenna must be kept at least six (6) inches away from any 
other antenna mounted on the vehicle and it must have at least six inches of surface ground plane beneath 
it. The following antenna installation procedure is recommended: 
A combination (“combo”) antenna kit includes a GPS antenna built into the base of the 
mobile antenna. Refer to Table 4-3  (page 18) and/or Figure 6-1 (page 25) for available 
combo antennas. 
1. Once the mounting location is selected, refer to the antenna manufacturer’s mounting and testing 
instructions for installation guidance. Install the antenna in accordance with these instructions. If 
necessary, contact M/A-COM’s Technical Assistance Center. See page 16 for TAC contact 
information. Do not alter the GPS antenna cable length; tie and stow excess cable as necessary. 

MM-014763-001 
28 
2. Route the cable from the antenna base to the location of where the radio will be installed. Remove 
headliner panel, interior panels, etc., as necessary. The cable must be kept out of casual contact from 
persons within the vehicle. Tie and stow it as necessary to protect it from possible chafing. 
3. The antenna cable is connected to the radio’s SMA receptacle-type (female) RF connector per a 
procedure presented later in this manual. The cable and its (male) SMA connector must be protected 
from damage, dirt, and/or metal shavings which may be generated during the mechanical and 
electrical installation of the radio. Temporarily tying the connector and cable-end within a small 
plastic bag is recommended. 

MM-014763-001 
29 
7  FRONT-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION 
This section includes detailed instructions for mechanically installing and wiring a 
front-mount M7300 mobile radio. For remote-mount M7300 mobile radio installation 
procedures, refer to Section 8 which begins on page 36.  
7.1  MOUNTING THE FRONT-MOUNT RADIO 
The Mounting Bracket Kit for the front-mount M7300 mobile radio includes a heavy-gauge steel 
U-shaped mounting bracket. The radio should be attached to a mounting surface using this bracket. The 
bracket can be mounted above or below the radio. Kit contents are shown in Figure 7-1, and bracket 
dimensions are shown in Figure 7-2. 
Both the radio and the mounting bracket have multiple holes in both sides for adjusting the radio within 
the bracket. The design allows for both front-to-rear tilting of the radio within the bracket for best viewing 
angle, and a front-to-rear position offset. The radio has six (6) threaded mounting holes, three (3) per side, 
and the mounting bracket has ten (10) corresponding holes, five (5) per side. The radio must be secured to 
the bracket using at least four of the six M5 socket-head screws included in the Mounting Bracket Kit (2 
screws per side). 
Typically, the radio is front-to-rear centered within the bracket. However, it can be front-to-rear offset by 
approximately 2 inches (5.1 centimeters), if required. Also, the radio can be positioned straight in the 
bracket (i.e., parallel with the bottom surface of the bracket), or it can be tilted up or down at an angle of 
between approximately 10 to 20 degrees. When positioned straight and centered front-to-rear within the 
bracket, the radio extends approximately 2.5 inches (6.4 centimeters) from the front and rear edges of the 
bracket. In the rear, additional clearance must be included for cables. The area directly at the front of the 
radio must be completely clear of all objects (e.g., gear shift, other radio equipment, etc.) so the operator 
can easily access and visualize the radio’s control head. 
The mounting bracket must be attached to a secure metal surface that meets or exceeds the minimum 
1/16-inch-thick steel sheet metal requirement in accordance with the following WARNING. For example, 
it can be attached directly to the bottom of the dash if the gauge of the sheet metal is high and the surface 
is firm and flat, or it can be attached to the transmission hump, etc., if a mounting wedge (not included) is 
utilized. The front-mount M7300 radio weighs approximately 9.2 pounds (4.17 kilograms). 
At a minimum, the mounting surface should be 16-guage (approximately 1/16-inch 
thick) steel sheet metal. Mounting to plastic or other material with low tensile and 
shear strength could lead to an unsafe and/or failed mounting condition, turning 
the radio and its mounting bracket into a projectile during a high-shock incident 
such as a motor vehicle accident. If the selected mounting surface does not meet 
the minimum 16-guage steel sheet metal requirement, the surface should be 
reinforced with a metal backing plate (not supplied) or it should be reinforced 
using some other approved mounting method. 
CAUTION  
In addition to improving safety of the installation, firm mounting also prevents 
unreasonable vibration that could damage the radio, adversely affect transceiver 
performance and/or cause its cable connections to loosen. An improperly mounted 
M7300 radio may experience degradation in the quality of voice and data 
communications. 

MM-014763-001 
30 
7.1.1 Mounting Bracket Installation 
The front-mount M7300 radio’s mounting bracket is included with the Remote-Mount Mounting Bracket 
Kit KT101533V1.  Kit contents are shown in Figure 7-1.  This kit is Item 1 listed in Table 4-1 (page 17). 
   Mounting Bracket 
  Self-Tapping Screws for  FM101319V1 
  Securing Bracket  (Marked KTB0310),  M5 Hardware for 
  to Mounting Surface  Ties and Grommet   Securing Radio to Bracket 
Figure 7-1:  Front-Mount Mounting Bracket Kit KT101533V1 
When selecting a mounting location for the radio, verify sufficient clearance can be maintained around 
the radio for installation and service access. A minimum clearance of approximately 4 inches 
(10 centimeters) is recommended at the rear, left and right sides of the radio. As previously stated, the 
area directly at the front of the radio must be completely clear of objects so the operator can easily access 
and visualize the radio’s control head. 
As illustrated in Figure 7-2, the bracket is both left-to-right and front-to-rear symmetrical. It has eleven 
(11) holes for securing it to a mounting surface. At least four (4) of these holes must be used to secure the 
bracket to the mounting surface. Five 20-millimeter-long self-tapping screws are included in the 
Mounting Bracket Kit for this purpose. However, some other type of hardware (not supplied) may be 
used, such as #10-32 stainless-steel self-locking hardware (i.e., machine screws with washers and locking 
nuts), or self-drilling screws. Self-drilling screws such as “TEK” screws do not require drilling of a pilot 
hole prior to installation. Do not use common self-threading sheet metal screws because they will loosen 
over time with vehicle vibrations. 
The following mounting procedure is recommended: 
1. Determine the best radio-to-bracket position and angle by test-fitting the radio into the mounting 
bracket at the selected vehicle mounting location. Slide the radio between the sides of the bracket and 
temporarily secure it to the bracket with several of the M5 socket-head screws from the bracket kit. 
When positioned straight and centered front-to-rear within the bracket, the radio extends 
approximately 2.5 inches (6.4 centimeters) from the front and rear edges of the bracket. In the rear, 
additional clearance must be included for cables. The area directly at the front of the radio must be 
completely clear of all objects (e.g., gear shift, other radio equipment, etc.) so the operator can easily 
access and visualize the radio’s control head. 
2. At the rear of the radio, verify sufficient clearance is available for cables and service access. 

MM-014763-001 
31 
 TOP VIEW    SIDE VIEW 
 (Dimensions in Inches) 
 FRONT/REAR VIEW 
 (Dimensions in Inches) 
  (Made From KBT0310B) 
Figure 7-2:  Mounting Bracket FM101319V1 (Marked KTB0310) Dimensions 
[for Front-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio (Radio Not Shown)] 
3. If the mounting surface is not flat (such as the top of a transmission hump), construct a suitable 
mounting wedge as necessary, and attach the wedge to the surface using an approved attachment 
method. Never mount the bracket directly to a non-flat surface. 
4. On the mounting surface, mark the selected location for the bracket, and then remove the radio from 
the bracket. 
5. Clean and remove any foreign material from the mounting surface. 
Bracket-To-Vehicle
 Screw Holes (11 places)
Bracket-To-Radio Screw Holes
(10 places,5 each side)

MM-014763-001 
32 
6. Using the bracket as a template, and/or the dimensional information shown in Figure 8-3, mark and 
drill at least four (4) mounting holes into the mounting surface as required per the type of hardware 
used. 
CAUTION  
Before drilling holes and/or installing mounting screws, verify these operations will not 
damage or interfere with any existing vehicle component (the fuel tank, a fuel line, the 
transmission housing, existing vehicle wiring, etc.). Always check to see how far the 
mounting screws will extend below the mounting surface prior to installation. Always 
deburr drilled holes before installing screws. 
7. Temporarily remove the bracket and deburr all of the newly drilled holes. 
8. If necessary, apply an approved paint or rust-inhibitor at the holes in the mounting surface. 
9. Set the bracket back into place. 
10. Install and tighten the mounting screws/hardware. 
11. Verify the bracket is firmly secured to the mounting surface. A secure mount prevents unreasonable 
vibration, which could damage the radio and/or cause its cable connections to loosen. 
12. If the rear of the radio is easily accessible when the radio is positioned in the selected position within 
the bracket, it is recommended that the radio be temporarily inserted into the bracket. Otherwise, do 
not mount the radio into the bracket at this time, because several cable connections must be made at 
the rear of the radio. 
7.1.2  Inserting the Radio into the Mounting Bracket 
The radio should now be inserted into the mounting bracket according to this procedure: 
1. Lay the radio into the mounting bracket with the front of the radio facing in the correct direction 
(usually towards the rear of the vehicle). 
2. Secure the radio to the bracket using at least four (4) of the six (6) M5 x 10 mm stainless-steel socket-
head screws included with the Mounting Bracket Kit. These screws have captive lockwashers. Kit 
contents are shown in Figure 7-1.  This kit is Item 1 listed in Table 4-1 (page 17). 
3. Tighten all screws using a 4-millimeter hex key wrench until each lockwasher is fully compressed 
and the radio is firm and flush in between the brackets. 
4. Check the mounting area for proper clearance for cable service looping and for air circulation, plus an 
area to secure and rest the excess cable lengths. 
Proper mounting is one factor that ensures optimal radio performance. An improperly 
mounted radio may experience degradation in the quality of voice and data 
communications. 
7.2  FRONT-MOUNT RADIO’S DC POWER INSTALLATION 
7.2.1 Overview of On/Off Power Wiring Configurations 
The following power wiring configurations are supported: 
• Radio turns on and off automatically with vehicle’s ignition switch/key — This configuration 
allows the on/off state of the vehicle’s ignition switch/key to control the on/off power state of the 

MM-014763-001 
33 
radio. The white wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable is connected to a fused switched power source, 
typically identified as vehicle “Accessory” power. This source must switch on (up to positive (+) 
battery voltage potential) when the vehicle’s ignition switch/key turns on, and it must switch off (to 
near zero volts) when the ignition switch/key turns off. The required fuse rating is 3 amperes. When 
using this configuration, the on/off/volume control must be left in the on position for automatic 
power-up/down to function properly. 
In a front-mount M7300 radio installation, to fuse the white wire of the radio’s DC 
Power Cable, a waterproof (HFB type) fuse holder and a 3-amp AGC fuse are included 
with the cable. 
• Radio turns on and off with a manual switch — This configuration is used when, for example, the 
radio must remain on even when the ignition key must be removed from the vehicle and a separate 
on/off switch is acceptable. The white wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable is connected to one side of 
a manually-controlled switch, and the other side of this switch is connected to unswitched and fused 
vehicle power. The required fuse rating is 3 amperes. When using this configuration, the 
on/off/volume control must be left in the on position for automatic power-up/down to function 
properly. 
• Radio turns on with its on/off/volume control (“hot wired”) — This configuration allows radio 
on/off power control only via its on/off/volume control. It may be desired if, for example, the radio 
must remain on even when the ignition key must be removed from the vehicle and a separate on/off 
switch is not desired and/or not acceptable. The white wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable must be 
connected to unswitched and fused vehicle power. The required fuse rating is 3 amperes. 
In all of the above cases, the radio’s main DC power input (red wire) must be connected through an in-
line fuse to unswitched vehicle DC power. The red wire must be connected to raw battery power (positive 
battery terminal) via the supplied fuse. 
7.2.2  DC Power Cable and Main Fuse Holder Installation 
The radio’s DC Power Cable has a 3-pin connector, a 20-foot red wire (for the main power connection), a 
20-foot white wire (for the switched power source connection), and a 4-foot black wire (for the ground 
connection). It is supplied with waterproof fuse holders, two AGC-type fuses, and non-insulated ring 
terminals. The following installation procedures are recommended: 
7.2.2.1  Black Wire Connection (Ground Wire) 
1. Connect the radio’s DC Power Cable to the radio by mating its 3-pin connector to the radio’s 3-pin 
power cable connector as follows: Visually align the key and firmly push and turn the outer locking 
ring clockwise until it stops. A click will be sensed to confirm proper mating. 
2. Prepare to connect the cable’s black wire to vehicle ground by locating an area of vehicle metal 
within approximately two (2) feet of the radio. This surface must have a solid and stable connection 
to vehicle ground. If not, add grounding strap(s) as necessary. 
3. Strip the area of any paint or dirt to expose a bare metal surface, approximately ¾-inch square. 
4. Drill a hole in the approximate center of the bare metal surface, and deburr it.  A ⅜-inch non-
insulated ring terminal is supplied with the cable to make this ground connection. Therefore, hole 
diameter should be appropriate for the utilized grounding screw/bolt size and type used to connect the 
ring terminal to the bare metal surface. This hardware is not supplied. 
5. Cut the black wire to the required length plus some additional length for a service loop, then strip 
insulation back approximately ¼-inch. 

MM-014763-001 
34 
6. Crimp a ⅜-inch non-insulated ring terminal (supplied with the cable) to the end of the black wire. 
7. Attach the ring terminal and black wire to the bare metal surface using stainless-steel self-locking 
hardware (i.e., machine screws with washers and locking nuts) or other appropriate hardware to 
ensure a reliable terminal-to-metal contact. Tighten securely. 
8. Apply an approved paint or rust-inhibitor over the remaining exposed bare metal surface and around 
the ring terminal. 
7.2.2.2  Red Wire and Main Fuse Holder Connection (Radio’s Main Power Wire) 
1. Continue installation of the radio’s DC Power Cable by routing its 20-foot 10-AWG red wire to the 
location of the vehicle’s battery (or its main DC bus bar or stud).  Remove interior panels, door kick 
panels, etc., and route the wire through existing channels in the vehicle body as necessary. Protect the 
wire from possible chafing where necessary. Tie and stow the wire as necessary. 
CAUTION  
Plan the routing of the 10-AWG red wire carefully, using an existing access hole in the 
vehicle’s firewall if possible. Alternately, drill a new hole approximately ½-inch in 
diameter and install a small rubber grommet (one supplied with the bracket kit) to 
protect the wire from chafing at the hole’s sharp metal edge. To prevent fumes from 
entering the passenger compartment, this hole/grommet/wire combination must 
also be sealed with a silicon-based sealer before completing the installation. 
CAUTION  
Do  not install any wiring or fuse holder over or in the near vicinity of the vehicle’s 
engine. Excessive engine heat can cause permanent damage to these components and 
can lead to intermittent electrical connection to the battery. 
Before making connections to the battery’s positive post, carefully disconnect the 
battery’s negative (ground) cable(s). This will prevent tools or other metallic 
objects which come in contact with the battery’s positive terminal from shorting to 
vehicle ground, causing sparks or even a fire or an explosion! When disconnecting 
the negative cable(s), cover/insulate the positive post(s) if it is not already so a tool 
cannot short between the posts. Some vehicles, such as those with diesel engines 
have more than one battery; in this case, disconnect the negative cables at all 
batteries. 
Radio and control head fuses should not be installed until all wiring is complete. 
This will prevent the radio from powering up prematurely and/or causing an in-
rush of current that could lead to shorting of the battery, sparks, or even fire. 
2. Obtain one of the waterproof (HFB type) fuse holders included with the DC Power Cable. 
3. Observe and follow the previously presented WARNING! 
4. Cut the red wire to the required length for connection to the battery’s positive (+) battery terminal (or 
the main DC bus bar or stud). 
5. Prepare to splice the waterproof fuse holder into the red wire by cutting it again, at approximately 
three (3) to six (6) inches from the end. 
6. Strip all three (3) wire ends back approximately ⅜-inch, place a fuse holder shell on each wire, and 
securely crimp a fuse holder terminal to each wire end. Before crimping, verify fuse holder shells are 
oriented in the correct directions (i.e., with each large end towards the wire end). 

MM-014763-001 
35 
7. Label this fuse holder and red wire appropriately (e.g., “M7300 Main Power: 15-AMP FUSE”) 
8. Do NOT install a fuse into the fuse holder at this time. 
9. Crimp an appropriate electrical terminal to the short red wire. A corrosion-resistant ⅜-inch ring 
terminal is included with the cable for this purpose, but another size corrosion-resistant terminal type 
(not supplied) may be used if required. 
10. Connect the ring terminal directly to the battery’s positive post (or if present, to a stud on the battery’s 
main/non-switched power distribution terminal block). 
11. Continue with the speaker installation procedures presented in Section 9.1 on page 53. 
A front-mount M7300 mobile radio installation may be equipped with additional CH-721 
control heads in a multi-head installation. In this case, refer to Section 8.3 (begins on page 
43 for control head installation procedures. 

MM-014763-001 
36 
8  REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION 
This section includes detailed instructions for mechanically installing and wiring a 
remote-mount M7300 mobile radio. For front-mount M7300 mobile radio installation 
procedures, refer to Section 7 which begins on page 29. 
8.1  MOUNTING THE REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO 
This section provides details on mounting a remote-mount M7300 mobile radio in the vehicle. Control 
head installation procedures are included in Section 8.3 which begins on page 43. 
As an assembled unit, the radio weighs approximately 8 pounds (3.63 kilograms). The preferred mounting 
of the radio is on top of a firm, flat surface. Radio dimensions are shown in Figure 8-1. 
Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R (contents listed in Table 4-2 on page 18) contains the 
most complete set of materials for installing the remote-mount M7300 mobile radio. 
Therefore, the following instructions make repeated reference to this kit. Item numbers 
given in parenthesis refer to items in the kit. 
Prior to beginning the installation, verify the radio has the proper version of software 
and verify it has been configured properly for customer usage. Consult with the radio 
system network administration personnel as necessary. 
CAUTION  
Though generally mounted in a trunk or remote location, the remote-mount mobile 
radio must be kept away from heat sources. Mounting it in a location which is out of 
direct sunlight is recommended but not required. Adequate ventilation space must be 
provided to the rear and side fins. The radio reduces its RF output power when its 
ambient temperature exceeds approximately +140 o Fahrenheit (+60o Celsius). 
At a minimum, the mounting surface should be 16-guage (approximately 1/16-inch 
thick) steel sheet metal. Mounting to plastic or other material with low tensile and 
shear strength could lead to an unsafe and/or failed mounting condition, turning 
the radio and its mounting bracket into a projectile during a high-shock incident 
such as a motor vehicle accident. If the selected mounting surface does not meet 
the minimum 16-guage steel sheet metal requirement, the surface should be 
reinforced with a metal backing plate (not supplied) or it should be reinforced 
using some other approved mounting method. 
CAUTION  
Before drilling holes and/or installing mounting screws, verify these operations will not 
damage or interfere with any existing vehicle component (the fuel tank, a fuel line, the 
transmission housing, existing vehicle wiring, etc.). Always check to see how far the 
mounting screws will extend below the mounting surface prior to installation. Always 
deburr drilled holes before installing screws. 
8.1.1 Mounting Bracket Installation 
The remote-mount radio’s mounting bracket is included with the Remote-Mount Mounting Bracket Kit 
KT23117.  Kit contents are shown in Figure 8-2. This kit is Item 1 listed in Table 4-2 (page 18). 

MM-014763-001 
37 
REAR VIEW
TOP VIEW
6.9 inches
(175 mm)
9.2 inches
(234 mm)
2.0 inches
(51 mm)
2.0 inches
(51 mm)
FRONT VIEW
6.9 inches
(175 mm)
(Partial View of
DC Power Cable)
Figure 8-1:  Remote-Mount Radio Dimensions 

MM-014763-001 
38 
  Mounting Bracket 
  M5 Hardware for  FM103111V1 
  Securing Radio to Bracket   
Figure 8-2:  Remote-Mount Mounting Bracket Kit KT23117 
Typically, the radio’s mounting bracket is mounted in the vehicle’s trunk, on the top surface of the trunk 
tray or the trunk floor. However, it can be suspended from the trunk’s rear deck if the surface is 
completely flat and the thickness of deck’s sheet metal is adequate. 
When selecting a mounting location for the radio, verify sufficient clearance can be maintained around 
the radio for installation and service access. A minimum clearance of 4 inches (approximately 
10 centimeters) is recommended at the rear, left and right sides of the radio, and at least 2 inches 
(approximately 5 centimeters) of clearance is recommended at the front of the radio. 
As illustrated in Figure 8-3, the bracket is left-to-right symmetrical and the shortest portion of its side 
rails are at the rear. 
As all installations differ, bracket-to-vehicle mounting screws are not included. Utilization of ¼-inch-
diameter, 28-thread-per-inch (¼-28) stainless-steel self-locking hardware (i.e., machine screws with 
washers and locking nuts) is highly recommended. However, ¼-inch stainless-steel self-drilling screws 
may be employed to speed installation time. Self-drilling screws such as “TEK” screws do not require 
drilling of a pilot hole prior to installation. Do not use common self-threading sheet metal screws because 
they will loosen over time with vehicle vibrations. 
The bracket has four (4) available mounting holes. All four must be used to secure the bracket to its 
mounting surface. 
The following mounting procedure is recommended: 
1. Using the mounting bracket as a template, and/or the dimensional information shown in Figure 8-3, 
mark and drill four (4) mounting holes into the mounting surface as required per the type of hardware 
used. When the radio is installed in the bracket, it will extend approximately one (1) inch past the 
front edge bracket, and at the rear, it will extend approximately ½-inch past the rear edge of the 
bracket. This distance at the rear does not include space required for cable connections at the rear of 
the radio. As previously stated, a clearance of least 4 inches (approximately 10 centimeters) at the 
rear of the radio is recommended. 
2. Temporarily remove the bracket and deburr all of the newly drilled holes. 
3. If necessary, apply an approved paint or rust-inhibitor at the holes in the mounting surface. 
4. Set the bracket back into place, and verify front-to-rear orientation. 

MM-014763-001 
39 
5. Install and tighten the mounting screws/hardware. 
6. Verify the bracket is firmly secured to the mounting surface. A secure mount prevents unreasonable 
vibration, which could damage the radio and/or cause its cable connections to loosen. 
 TOP VIEW    SIDE VIEW 
 (Dimensions in Inches) 
 FRONT VIEW 
 (Dimensions in Inches) 
 (Made From FM103111 Rev. B) 
Figure 8-3:  Mounting Bracket FM103111V1 Dimensions 
[for Remote-Mount M7300 Mobile Radio (Radio Not Shown)] 
Bracket-To-
V
ehicle 
Screw Holes 
(4 places) 
Bracket-To-Radio 
Screw Holes
(6 places,
3 each side)
Rear of Bracket
Front of Bracket

MM-014763-001 
40 
8.1.2  Inserting the Radio into the Mounting Bracket 
The radio should now be inserted into the bracket according to this procedure: 
1. Lay the radio down into the mounting bracket with the front of the radio at the front of the mounting 
bracket. 
2. Attach the radio into the mounting bracket using the six (6) Torx® drive M5 x 10 mm stainless-steel 
socket-head screws, and flatwashers and lockwashers included with the Mounting Bracket Kit (item 1 
in Table 4-2).  Tighten all six screws using a 4-millimeter hex key wrench until each lockwasher is 
fully compressed and the radio is firm and flush in between the brackets. 
3. Check the mounting area for proper clearance for cable service looping and for air circulation, plus an 
area to secure and rest the excess cable lengths. 
Proper mounting is one factor that ensures optimal radio performance. An improperly 
mounted radio may experience degradation in the quality of voice and data 
communications. 
8.2  REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO’S DC POWER INSTALLATION 
8.2.1 Overview of On/Off Power Wiring Configurations 
Radio on/off power control is accomplished by the control head, except in the case of a data-only radio 
installation which has no control head. In a standard installation, when the control head is turned on, it 
“wakes-up” the radio via data activity on the CAN link. The following power wiring configurations are 
supported: 
• Radio turns on and off automatically with vehicle’s ignition switch/key — This configuration 
allows the on/off state of the vehicle’s ignition switch/key to control the on/off power state of the 
radio. The white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable is connected to a fused switched power 
source, typically identified as vehicle “Accessory” power. This source must switch on (up to positive 
(+) battery voltage potential) when the vehicle’s ignition switch/key turns on, and it must switch off 
(to near zero volts) when the ignition switch/key turns off. The required fuse rating is 3 amperes. 
When using this configuration, the CH-721 control head’s on/off/volume control must be left in the 
on position for automatic power-up/down to function properly. 
In a remote-mount radio installation, to fuse the white wire of the control head’s DC 
Power Cable, a waterproof (HFB type) fuse holder and a 3-amp AGC fuse are included 
with the cable. 
• Radio turns on and off with a manual switch — This configuration is used when, for example, the 
radio must remain on even when the ignition key must be removed from the vehicle and a separate 
on/off switch is acceptable. The white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable is connected to one 
side of a manually-controlled switch, and the other side of this switch is connected to unswitched and 
fused vehicle power. The required fuse rating is 3 amperes. When using this configuration, the 
CH-721 control head’s on/off/volume control must be left in the on position for automatic power-
up/down to function properly. 
• Radio turns on with control head’s on/off/volume control (“hot wired”) — This configuration 
allows radio on/off power control only via the control head’s on/off/volume control. It may be desired 
if, for example, the radio must remain on even when the ignition key must be removed from the 
vehicle and a separate on/off switch is not desired and/or not acceptable. The white wire of the 

MM-014763-001 
41 
control head’s DC Power Cable must be connected to unswitched and fused vehicle power. The 
required fuse rating is 3 amperes. 
In all of the above cases, both the radio’s main DC power input (red wire) and the control head’s main 
DC power input (also a red wire) must each be connected through an in-line fuse to unswitched vehicle 
DC power. The red wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable must be connected to raw battery power (positive 
battery terminal) via the supplied fuse. Likewise, the red wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable must 
also be connected to unswitched vehicle DC power via another supplied fuse. The white ignition wire of 
the radio’s DC Power Cable is only used for the data-only radio (i.e., no control head), and it is the only 
means for turning its power on in the data-only radio installation. 
8.2.2  DC Power Cable and Main Fuse Holder Installation 
The radio’s DC Power Cable has a 3-pin connector, a 20-foot red wire (for the main power connection), a 
20-foot white wire (only connected in a data-only radio installation), and a 4-foot black wire (for the 
ground connection). It is supplied with waterproof fuse holders, two AGC-type fuses, and non-insulated 
ring terminals. The following installation procedures are recommended: 
8.2.2.1  Black Wire Connection (Ground Wire) 
1. Connect the radio’s DC Power Cable to the radio by mating its 3-pin connector to the radio’s 3-pin 
power cable connector as follows: Visually align the key and firmly push and turn the outer locking 
ring clockwise until it stops. A click will be sensed to confirm proper mating. 
CAUTION  
Do not confuse the radio’s DC Power Cable which has a 10-AWG red wire with the 
control head’s DC Power Cable which has a 12-AWG red wire. The radio requires 
much more DC operating current than the control head. Therefore, it requires the 
larger wire size of 10-AWG.  The part number of the radio’s DC Power Cable is 
CA-012365-001.  
2. Prepare to connect the cable’s black wire to vehicle ground by locating an area of vehicle metal 
within approximately two (2) feet of the radio. This surface must have a solid and stable connection 
to vehicle ground. If not, add grounding strap(s) as necessary. 
3. Strip the area of any paint or dirt to expose a bare metal surface, approximately ¾-inch square. 
4. Drill a hole in the approximate center of the bare metal surface, and deburr it.  A ⅜-inch non-
insulated ring terminal is supplied with the cable to make this ground connection. Therefore, hole 
diameter should be appropriate for the utilized grounding screw/bolt size and type used to connect the 
ring terminal to the bare metal surface. This hardware is not supplied. 
5. Cut the black wire to the required length plus some additional length for a service loop, then strip 
insulation back approximately ¼-inch. 
6. Crimp a ⅜-inch non-insulated ring terminal (supplied with the cable) to the end of the black wire. 
7. Attach the ring terminal and black wire to the bare metal surface using stainless-steel self-locking 
hardware (i.e., machine screws with washers and locking nuts) or other appropriate hardware to 
ensure a reliable terminal-to-metal contact. Tighten securely. 
8. Apply an approved paint or rust-inhibitor over the remaining exposed bare metal surface and around 
the ring terminal. 

MM-014763-001 
42 
8.2.2.2  Red Wire and Main Fuse Holder Connection (Radio’s Main Power Wire) 
1. Continue installation of the radio’s DC Power Cable by routing its 20-foot 10-AWG red wire to the 
location of the vehicle’s battery (or its main DC bus bar or stud).  Remove interior panels, door kick 
panels, etc., and route the wire through existing channels in the vehicle body as necessary. Protect the 
wire from possible chafing where necessary. Tie and stow the wire as necessary. 
CAUTION  
Plan the routing of the 10-AWG red wire carefully, using an existing access hole in the 
vehicle’s firewall if possible. Alternately, drill a new hole approximately 3/8-inch in 
diameter and install a small rubber grommet to protect the wire from chafing on the 
hole’s sharp metal edge. To prevent fumes from entering the passenger 
compartment, this hole/grommet/wire combination must also be sealed with a 
silicon-based sealer before completing the installation. 
CAUTION  
Do  not install any wiring or fuse holder over or in the near vicinity of the vehicle’s 
engine. Excessive engine heat can cause permanent damage to these components and 
can lead to intermittent electrical connection to the battery. 
Before making connections to the battery’s positive post, carefully disconnect the 
battery’s negative (ground) cable(s). This will prevent tools or other metallic 
objects which come in contact with the battery’s positive terminal from shorting to 
vehicle ground, causing sparks or even a fire or an explosion! When disconnecting 
the negative cable(s), cover/insulate the positive post(s) if it is not already so a tool 
cannot short between the posts. Some vehicles, such as those with diesel engines 
have more than one battery; in this case, disconnect the negative cables at all 
batteries. 
Radio and control head fuses should not be installed until all wiring is complete. 
This will prevent the radio from powering up prematurely and/or causing an in-
rush of current that could lead to shorting of the battery, sparks, or even fire. 
2. Obtain one of the waterproof (HFB type) fuse holders included with the DC Power Cable. 
3. Observe and follow the previously presented WARNING! 
4. Cut the red wire to the required length for connection to the battery’s positive (+) battery terminal (or 
the main DC bus bar or stud). 
5. Prepare to splice the waterproof fuse holder into the red wire by cutting it again, at approximately 
three (3) to six (6) inches from the end. 
6. Strip all three (3) wire ends back approximately ⅜-inch, place a fuse holder shell on each wire, and 
securely crimp a fuse holder terminal to each wire end. Before crimping, verify fuse holder shells are 
oriented in the correct directions (i.e., with each large end towards the wire end). 
7. Label this fuse holder and red wire appropriately (e.g., “M7300 Main Power: 15-AMP FUSE”). 
8. Do NOT install a fuse into the fuse holder at this time. 
9. Crimp an appropriate electrical terminal to the short red wire. A corrosion-resistant ⅜-inch ring 
terminal is included with the cable for this purpose, but another size corrosion-resistant terminal type 
(not supplied) may be used if required. 

MM-014763-001 
43 
10. Connect the ring terminal directly to the battery’s positive post (or if present, to a stud on the battery’s 
main/non-switched power distribution terminal block). 
Most M7300 radio installations have one or more control heads connected to the radio. In 
an installation of this type, the white wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable requires no 
electrical connection. Rather than be cut from the cable, it is recommended that it be 
routed up to the vehicle’s fuse box, coiled, labeled, and stowed for possible future use.  
The white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable is the radio installation’s ignition 
sense input for on/off power control of both the control head and radio. Radio on/off 
power control is accomplished by the control head. The control head “wakes-up” the radio 
via data activity on the CAN link. 
8.2.2.3  White Wire Connection (for Data-Only Radio Installations) 
In the case of a data-only radio installation (i.e., no control head connected to the radio), the white wire of 
the radio’s DC Power Cable is used as the radio installation’s ignition sense input. Therefore, it requires 
electrical connection to a fused switched power source. The following procedure is recommended: 
1. Route the 20-foot white wire of the radio’s DC Power Cable to the location of the vehicle’s switched 
power source connection point, typically identified as “Accessory” power. Remove interior panels, 
door kick panels, etc., and route the wire through existing channels in the vehicle body as necessary. 
Protect the wire from possible chafing where necessary. Tie and stow the wire as necessary. 
2. Connect this white wire through a fuse to the switched power source in accordance with the 
instructions presented within the respective subsection of Section 8.3.4.2 (page 50) for the control 
head’s white wire. Follow the procedure in Section 8.3.4.2.1 (page 50) if the vehicle’s ignition 
switch/key must control the data-only radio’s on/off power. Follow the procedure in Section 8.3.4.2.2 
(page 51) if a manually-controlled switch must control the data-only radio’s on/off power. 
The “hot wired” wiring configuration (as depicted in Section 8.3.4.2.3) cannot be utilized 
for the data-only radio, since this configuration does not employ the DC Power Cable’s 
white wire. 
CAUTION  
When servicing the radio and/or control head, always manually power-down the radio 
equipment via the control head’s on/off/volume control knob, and then remove the main 
power fuse near the battery. 
8.3  CONTROL HEAD INSTALLATION 
8.3.1 General Information 
The remote-mount M7300 mobile radio must be connected to a control head to provide the operator-to-
radio interface. Two different control heads are available — the CH-721 Scan model and the CH-721 
System model. See Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5 respectively. The CH-721 Scan model control head features 
three (3) large menu selection buttons. The System model control head has a 12-button keypad to allow 
advanced operations without the need of a DTMF-capable microphone. 
Figure 8-6 on page 45 illustrates the rear panel of the two control head models. Both models have 
identical rear panels and rear panel connectors. 

MM-014763-001 
44 
Figure 8-4:  CH-721 Scan Model Control Head Front Panel 
(Other controls are same as shown for Scan model.) 
Figure 8-5:  CH-721 System Model Control Head Front Panel 
The CH-721 control heads feature a large easy-to-read 3-line graphical vacuum fluorescent display, an 
on/off/volume control knob, menu controls and buttons, trunking mode buttons, an emergency/home 
button, a scan on/off/volume control, and three (3) preset buttons. Other front panel components include a 
microphone connector and LED-type indictors. One LED indicator is the busy indicator that lights when 
the radio is receiving a call and one is the transmitter-enabled indicator that lights when the radio is 
transmitting. The front panel also has an ambient light sensor for automatic display dimming. 
3-Line Graphical Vacuum 
Fluorescent Display 
Microphone Connecto
r
On/Off/ 
Volume 
Control 
System/-
Group/-
Channel 
Selection 
Control 
•/•• Ramp Control
Preset/ 
Softkey 
Buttons 
Emergency/
Home Button
+/- Ramp Control 
Ambient Light-Level Sensor 
Transmit 
and Busy 
Indicators 
Scan On/Off Button 
Clear Button
Menu Button
Option Button
12-Button Keypad 
Clear Button
Menu Button
Option Button

MM-014763-001 
45 
Figure 8-6:  CH-721 Rear Panel (both control head models) 
Prior to installing the control head, verify it has the proper software version installed and 
verify it has been properly configured for customer use. 
Because Installation Kit MAMW-NZN7R contains the most complete set of materials for 
installing the radio and control head, the following instructions make repeated reference 
to items within this kit. Item numbers given in parenthesis refer to items in the kit as 
listed in Table 4-2 on page 18. 
In a mobile installation, more than one control head can be connected to one mobile radio for multi-head 
installations. A multi-head installation may be required in a vehicle such as a fire truck or any large 
vehicle where more than one operator may require use of the radio. Multi-head installations also provide 
other benefits such as intercom functionality between different operator positions. 
CAN Port 
Connectors
(2 places)
Speaker Audio
Connecto
r
Serial Port Connecto
r
(DB-9)
DC Power 
Connector 
Accessory Connecto
r
(DB-25) Note: Serial and Accessory connectors are 
shown without waterproof covers. 

MM-014763-001 
46 
8.3.2  Control Head Mechanical Installation 
8.3.2.1 Selecting the Mounting Location 
When selecting a location for the CH-721 control head, first observe the safety and operator-convenience 
related information presented in Section 5.1 on page 21.  Always consider and include clearance for the 
microphone’s connector that must mate to the mic connector on the front panel of the head, and clearance 
for the connectors/cables that must mate to the connectors on the rear panel of the head. The CH-721 
control head can be mounted under or on top of a mounting surface (typically the vehicle’s dash) as space 
permits using either the standard U-shaped mounting bracket or the optional mounting pedestal. 
Figure 8-7:  Standard U-Shaped Control Head Mounting Bracket (Kit Part Number KT-008608) 
Figure 8-8:  Optional Control Head Mounting Pedestal (Part Number MACDOS0012) 
Mounting Bracket (Shown 
positioned above control head) 
Control Head Mounting 
Pedestal MACDOS0012 
(Pedestal can be attached to the 
bottom of the head (as shown) or it 
can be attached to the top of the 
head.) 
Bracket shown 
attached to a CH-721 
System model 
control head (Head is 
not included with 
Mounting Bracket Kit) 
Pedestal shown 
attached to a CH-721 
Scan model control 
head (Head is not 
included with Mounting 
Pedestal) 
Socket-Head Cap (Allen) Screw, Lockwasher and Flat 
Washer; 2 places each side (Included with kit) 
#8-32 Pan-Head Screw; 4
places (Included with
Mounting Pedestal)
For a “hanging” control head
installation, the pedestal can
be attached to the top of the
head via threaded holes in
the top of the head’s case.
This figure shows the
pedestal attached to the
bottom of the control head via
threaded holes in the bottom
of the case. 

MM-014763-001 
47 
8.3.2.2  Using the Standard U-Shaped Mounting Bracket 
If the standard U-shaped mounting bracket will be used to mount the control head, the following 
mounting procedure is recommended. As listed in Table 4-2 on page 18, this bracket is item 2 in the 
Installation Kit. 
1. Using the mounting bracket as a template, mark and drill mounting holes into the mounting surface as 
required. The round and elliptical holes in the bracket’s vehicle mounting surface are symmetrical, so 
forwards/backwards positioning is not important during this step. However, positioning is important 
in the next step. 
CAUTION  
Before drilling holes and/or installing mounting screws, verify these operations will not 
damage or interfere with any existing vehicle component (the fuel tank, a fuel line, the 
transmission housing, existing vehicle wiring, etc.). Always check to see how far the 
mounting screws will extend below the mounting surface prior to installation. Always 
deburr drilled holes before installing screws. 
2. Postion the bracket at the mounting surface so the two round holes in its two side “ears” are nearest to 
the normal location of the operator (typically towards the rear of the vehicle) and the two slotted holes 
are furthest from the normal location of the operator (typically towards the front of the vehicle). 
3. Install and tighten the mounting screws. Screws for mounting the bracket to the mounting vehicle’s 
surface are not included, as all installations differ. Self-threading screws are recommended. Use of 
self-drilling screws may cause damage to some mounting surfaces, such as a plastic dash panel. 
4. Verify the bracket is held firmly to the mounting surface. Firm mounting prevents unreasonable 
vibration, which could damage the control head and/or cause its cable connections to loosen. 
5. Slide the control head into the bracket, placing the two pegs protruding from its left and right sides 
into the respective round holes in the bracket’s two side “ears.” 
6. In each side “ear” of the mounting bracket, start a #8-32 hex-socket-head cap (Allen) head screw with 
a lockwasher and a flat washer by inserting the screw through the slotted hole in the bracket and then 
into the threaded hole in the side of the control head. This hardware is included with Mounting 
Bracket Kit. The lockwasher should be adjacent to the screw head and the flat washer should be 
adjacent to the bracket. Turn each screw clockwise as observed from the head of the screw. 
7. The control head can be positioned at various angles for best display viewing at the normal position 
of the operator. As necessary, turn it on the pegs to a good position and tighten both screws using an 
1/8-inch hex key (Allen) wrench until the control head is held firmly in place. Do not over-tighten. 
8.3.2.3  Using the Mounting Pedestal (Optional) 
An optional Mounting Pedestal, part number MACDOS0012, may be purchased separately to replace the 
standard U-shaped mounting bracket. This pedestal can be attached to the bottom of the control head as 
shown in Figure 8-8, and then mounted to a mounting surface below the two. It can also be attached to the 
top of the head and then mounted to a mounting surface above the two. 
8.3.3  Control Head-to-Radio CAN Cable Connections 
8.3.3.1 General Information 
A remote-mount radio installation requires a CAN cable between every two “CAN devices” and CAN 
terminators on each end of the CAN link. The M7300 mobile radio is considered a CAN device, and each 
CH-721 control head in the installation is also considered a CAN device. Figure 8-9 illustrates CAN cable 

MM-014763-001 
48 
and CAN terminator connections for a single control head installation. Figure 8-10 illustrates this for a 
multi-head control head installation where, for example, one control head is located at the main operator 
location and another is located near the rear of the vehicle. Because CAN devices do not have internal 
terminators, the CAN link must be terminated at both ends via external CAN terminators, as depicted in 
the following figures. 
For Available CAN Cable Lengths and Respective Part Numbers, see Table 4-4 on page 20. 
Figure 8-9:  CAN Link Connections for a Single Control Head Installation 
For Available CAN Cable Lengths and Respective Part Numbers, see Table 4-4 on page 20. 
Figure 8-10:  Typical CAN Link Connections for a Multi-Control Head Installation 
Both the radio and the control head have two CAN ports to support “daisy-chaining” of multiple control 
heads or other CAN devices. Figure 5-3 on page 23 shows the radio’s two CAN port connectors, which 

MM-014763-001 
49 
are located near the center of the radio’s rear panel. Figure 8-6 on page 45 shows the two CAN port 
connectors on the control head’s rear panel. 
8.3.3.2  Make CAN Link Terminations and Cable Connection 
Follow this procedure for an installation which has only one control head. For a multi-control head 
installation, refer to Figure 8-10 as necessary. 
1. Mate a CAN Terminator (item 5 in Table 4-2 on page 18) onto either one of the two smaller 3-pin 
CAN port connectors on the rear panel of the CH-721.  This action makes the CAN termination at the 
control head end of the CAN link. 
When mating any CAN connection (terminators and cables) to a rear panel connector, 
visually align the ¾-moon-shaped keys of the connectors, and then gently push and 
turn the outer locking ring of the plug (male) connector clockwise until it stops. A mild 
click will be sensed to confirm proper mating. Without visual alignment as a guide, it 
is possible with excessive force to mate the CAN connectors improperly. Damage to 
the connector(s) may result. Therefore, visual alignment is recommended when mating 
CAN connectors. 
2. Obtain a CAN Cable and mate it to the other CAN port connector on the rear panel of the CH-721. 
Typically, item 6 in Table 4-2 is utilized, a 30-foot CAN cable. 
3. Route the cable through the vehicle’s interior wire/cable channeling to the radio. Remove interior 
panels, door kick panels, etc., as necessary. Protect the cable from possible chafing as necessary. 
4. Mate this other end of the cable to one of the two CAN port connectors on the rear panel of the radio. 
5. Mate another CAN Terminator to the other CAN port connector on the rear panel of the radio. This 
action makes the CAN termination at the radio-end of the CAN link. 
6. Loop, tie and stow the excess cable as necessary, leaving a service loop at the back of the radio and at 
the back of the control head. 
8.3.4  Control Head Power Cable Installation 
Plan the route of the control head’s DC Power Cable carefully. Do not route the cable where it will be 
damaged by heat sources or by casual contact, and protect it from wire chafe per standard installation 
methods. The following procedures are recommended: 
8.3.4.1  Install DC Power Cable and Make Power and Ground Connections 
1. Connect the control head’s DC Power Cable (item 4 in Table 4-2 on page 18) to the large 3-pin 
connector at the rear of the head. Visually align the key and gently push and turn the outer locking 
ring clockwise until it stops. A click will be sensed to confirm proper mating. 
2. At the back of the control head, locate a nearby section of vehicle chassis ground and strip this area of 
any paint or dirt to expose a bare metal surface. 
3. Cut the black wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable to the required length, plus a service loop of 
at least six (6) inches, then strip it and crimp a 3/8-inch ring terminal to it. Two ring terminals of this 
type are included with the cable. 
4. Drill a hole as necessary and attach this ring terminal to chassis ground. Use stainless-steel self-
locking hardware (i.e., machine screws with washers and locking nuts) or other appropriate hardware 
to ensure a reliable terminal-to-metal contact. Tighten securely. 

MM-014763-001 
50 
5. At the back of the control head, tie and stow the cable as necessary. 
6. For the positive 12-volt DC main power source connection, route the cable’s red wire to the location 
of an unswitched 12-volt DC power source, typically near the vehicle’s battery. Remove interior 
panels, door kick panels, etc. Protect the wire from possible chafing as necessary. This is the control 
head’s main DC power source. 
7. Obtain one of the waterproof (HFB-type) fuse holders included with the control head’s DC Power 
Cable. 
8. Cut excess length from the red wire and splice the fuse holder into it, near the location of the 
unswitched 12-volt DC power source connection point. 
9. Using an appropriate electrical terminal, connect the red wire to the unswitched DC power source. A 
3/8-inch ring terminal is included with the cable for this purpose, but another terminal type (not 
supplied) may be used if required. 
10. Obtain the 5-amp AGC-type fuse included with the cable, and install it into the fuse holder. 
Do not share the control head’s fuse with any other device. Doing so can cause excess 
current to flow through the fuse, causing it to blow unnecessarily. 
CAUTION  
The fuse for the control head’s red wire is rated at 5 amperes. The 3-amp fuse included 
with the cable must not be used for fusing the control head’s main DC power. It fuses 
the head’s white wire. 
8.3.4.2  Connect DC Power Cable’s White Wire 
A review of the information presented in Section 8.2.1 (page 40) may be beneficial at this time. As 
required per the chosen power-up configuration, connect the white wire by following one of the three 
procedures presented in the respective sub-section that follows. 
8.3.4.2.1 Control Head and Radio Turn on with Vehicle’s Ignition Switch/Key 
With this wiring configuration, the control head and radio automatically turn on and off with the vehicle’s 
ignition switch/key. The white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable is sometimes referred to as the 
“white ignition switch wire” or the “ignition sense input wire.” In this configuration, the white wire 
connects to a switched power source, typically identified as “Accessory” power, that switches on and off 
with the vehicle’s ignition switch/key. When using this configuration, the CH-721 control head’s 
on/off/volume control must be left in the on position for automatic power-up/down to function properly. 
The white ignition sense wire must be connected to a fused power source that switches 
from approximately zero volts to approximately +13.6 volts when the vehicle’s ignition 
switch/key is turned from the OFF position to the ACCESSORY and RUN positions. 
Use of a switched power source that is subject to voltage changes as a result of other 
actions, such as opening a vehicle door, may result in undesirable radio operation and/or 
a degradation of radio performance. 
1. Locate the vehicle’s switched ignition or “Accessory” power connection point that will be used for 
the switched ignition 12-volt DC power source. This point is typically located at or near the vehicle’s 
fuse panel. It may be necessary to consult the vehicle manufacturer’s wiring diagram. 

MM-014763-001 
51 
2. Route the white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable from the back of the head to the area near 
this connection point. Protect the wire from possible chafing as necessary. 
3. Obtain one of the waterproof (HFB-type) fuse holders included with the control head’s DC Power 
Cable. 
4. Cut excess length from the white wire and splice the fuse holder into it, near the location of the 
connection point. 
5. Using an appropriate electrical terminal, connect the white wire to the switched power connection 
point. An open-barrel spade terminal is included with the cable for this purpose, but another type of 
terminal (not supplied) may be used as required. 
6. Obtain the 3-amp AGC-type fuse included with the cable, and install it into the fuse holder. 
7. Tie and stow all wiring as necessary so it remains out of the way of casual contact and wire chafe is 
avoided. 
8.3.4.2.2 Control Head and Radio Turn On with a Manual Switch 
With this wiring configuration, the control head and radio are manually turned on and off via an on/off 
switch mounted separately from the control head and radio, not through the vehicle’s ignition switch/key. 
This configuration is used when, for example, the radio must remain on even when the ignition key must 
be removed from the vehicle and a separate on/off switch is acceptable and/or required. In this 
configuration, the white wire connects to a fused switched power source such as that provided by a toggle 
switch mounted on the vehicle’s dash panel. When using this configuration, the CH-721 control head’s 
on/off/volume control must be left in the on position for automatic power-up/down to function properly. 
1. Route the white wire of the control head’s DC Power Cable from the back of the head to an area near 
the location of the panel-mounted on/off switch. Protect the wire from possible chafing as necessary. 
2. Cut a short section (6 to 8 inches) off the end of the white wire and strip the ends. 
3. Obtain one of the waterproof (HFB-type) fuse holders included with the control head’s DC Power 
Cable, and crimp one half of it to one end of the short section of wire. 
4. Using an appropriate electrical terminal, connect this short white wire to unswitched 12-volt DC 
power source at or near the vehicle’s fuse box. 
5. Cut another section of white wire from the cable. This wire must be long enough to reach from this 
fuse holder to the location of the panel-mounted on/off switch. 
6. Strip one end of this wire and crimp the other half of the waterproof fuse holder to this wire end. 
7. Strip the other end of this wire and, using an appropriate electrical terminal, connect it to the common 
terminal of the switch. 
8. Connect the white wire of the power cable to the load (switched) side of the switch. 
9. If not already, mount the switch to the vehicle’s dash panel, or other customer-selected location. 
10. Obtain the 3-amp AGC-type fuse included with the cable, and install it into the fuse holder. 
11. Tie and stow these wires as necessary so they remain out of the way of casual contact and wire chafe 
is avoided. 
12. Label this power switch accordingly. For example: “RADIO ON/OFF.” 

MM-014763-001 
52 
8.3.4.2.3 Control Head and Radio Are “Hot Wired” 
In the “hot-wired” configuration, the control head and radio are turned on and off only by the control 
head’s on/off/volume control located on the front panel of the control head. In this configuration, the 
control head’s white wire must be connected to unswitched and fused 12-volt vehicle power. Follow the 
procedure presented in Section 8.3.4.2.1, except connect the white wire to unswitched battery power 
instead of switched (“Accessory”) power. 

MM-014763-001 
53 
9 SPEAKER INSTALLATION 
9.1 FRONT-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION 
In a front-mount radio installation, total speaker cable length (of both cables) is approximately 10 feet 
(308 centimeters). Therefore, to include service loops in these cables, the speaker must be mounted within 
approximately 9.5 feet (290 centimeters) of the M7300 mobile radio. 
1. Select a location for the speaker that will allow for proper listening range with a moderate volume 
setting. 
2. Install the speaker using the hardware and mounting bracket supplied with it. For the speaker’s part 
number, see Table 4-1 (page 17). 
3. Route the speaker cable to the rear of the M7300 mobile radio. 
4. Connect the M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 (item 5 in Table 4-1) to the DB-44 
connector on the rear of the radio. Tighten the cable’s two (2) jackscrews securely. See Section 11.1 
for additional information on this cable. 
5. Mate the Option Cable’s 2-pin connector (identified P2) to the 2-pin connector on the end of the 
speaker cable. A mild click will be sensed to confirm proper mating. 
6. Route the cables out of the way of casual contact. Tie and stow as necessary. 
9.2 REMOTE-MOUNT RADIO INSTALLATION 
In a remote-mount radio installation, total speaker cable length (of both cables) is approximately five (5) 
feet. Therefore, to include service loops in these cables, the speaker must be mounted within 
approximately 4.5 feet of the installation’s CH-721 control head. 
1. Select a location for the speaker that will allow for proper listening range with a moderate volume 
setting. 
2. Install the speaker using the hardware and mounting bracket supplied with it. For the speaker’s part 
number, see Table 4-2 (page 18). 
3. Route the speaker cable to the rear of the CH-721 control head. 
4. Mate the 6-inch speaker cable (item 8 in Table 4-2) to the 2-pin connector at the rear of the control 
head by visually aligning the ¾-moon-shaped keys of the connectors, and then pushing and turning 
the outer locking ring of the cable connector clockwise until it stops. A mild click will be sensed to 
confirm proper mating. 
5. Connect the speaker cable’s 2-pin plastic connector to the respective mating connector on the 6-inch 
speaker cable. 
6. Route the cables out of the way of casual contact. Tie and stow as necessary. 

MM-014763-001 
54 
10 MICROPHONE ATTACHMENT 
There are several versions of microphones available for use with the radio. Each has a 17-pin flush-mount 
type connector that mates with the mic connector on the front panel of the control head. The mic’s 
connector includes a captive thumbscrew that secures it to the mic connector on the front panel of the 
control head. A microphone clip is included with each microphone. The radio can be configured to 
provide a monitor function when the microphone is cradled in the clip. Connect the mic to the control 
head and install the clip as follows: 
1. As illustrated in Figure 10-1, grasp the mic’s connector with a thumb and index finger on the sides of 
the connector just adjacent to the thumbscrew. 
2. Position the connector in front of the control head’s mic connector so the mic cable’s stain relief is 
hanging down and out at an approximate 45 degree angle. 
3. Mate the two connectors by pressing them fully together. Do not apply any force to the thumbscrew 
when mating the connectors. 
4. Tighten the thumbscrew finger-tight.  Do not use a screwdriver to tighten it. 
5. Using the microphone clip as a template, drill mounting holes in the surface of the selected location. 
6. Select a mounting surface location that has clearance for the mic when it is clipped to the clip, and 
then attach the microphone clip to the surface. Use self-locking hardware (i.e., machine screws with 
washers and locking nuts), self-drilling screws, or other appropriate hardware as necessary. Tighten 
securely. 
7. The microphone clip must be grounded to the vehicle’s chassis. If not mounted to a grounded metal 
surface, complete this requirement by adding a jumper wire attached from chassis ground to the clip. 
8. Clip the microphone to the clip. 
Figure 10-1:  Attaching the Microphone to the CH-721Control Head 
As illustrated, do not apply any
force to the thumbscrew when
mating the mic connectors. 

MM-014763-001 
55 
11 OPTIONAL CABLES 
11.1  M5300/M7300 OPTION CABLE CA-012349-001 
M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 connects to the 44-pin I/O cable connector on the rear of 
the radio. It breaks out into several smaller standardized connectors, allowing straightforward access to 
external I/O interfaces provided by the radio. The cable also shortens radio removal and re-installation 
time when required. The cable is shown in Figure 11-1 below. The cable’s 44-pin D-subminiature 
connector that mates with the connector on the rear of the radio is identified P1. 
P2, the cable’s 2-pin connector, provides connections for an external speaker in a front-mount M7300 
mobile radio installation. See Section 9.1 (page 53) for connection instructions. P2 is not used in a 
remote-mount radio installation. In a remote-mount radio installation, the audio amplifier in the CH-721 
control head drives the external speaker. In this case, the speaker connection is made at the rear of the 
control head. 
Approximately 66 inches
(170 centimeters)
(Pin-Out 
View)
(Side View)
WIRING DIAGRAM
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
(Made From PS-CA-012349 Rev. -) 
Figure 11-1:  M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 

MM-014763-001 
56 
P3, the cable’s 6-pin connector, is a connector for basics accessories (e.g., hookswitch, etc.). 
P4, the cable’s D-subminiature 25-pin connector, provides audio and data connections for connections to 
optional equipment such as an external siren and light system (e.g., Federal Signal SS2000 SmartSiren®). 
P5, the cable’s D-subminiature 9-pin connector, provides NMEA-formatted GPS serial data connections 
for the external computer processing the NMEA-formatted GPS data received by the radio’s internal GPS 
receiver. See Section 12 on page 61 for additional information. 
Table 11-1:  M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 Interconnections 
44-PIN I/O 
CABLE 
CONNECTOR 
P1 PIN 
SIGNAL NAME  TO/FROM  DESCRIPTION 
19 SPKR1 
20 SPKR1 
P2 pin 1  Speaker Audio Output 1 
(Not used in a remote-mount radio installation) 
21 SPKR2 
22 SPKR2 
P2 pin 2  Speaker Audio Output 2 
(Not used in a remote-mount radio installation) 
10  OUT2  P3 pin 1  Digital Output 2 (open-collector) 
7  GND  P3 pins 2 & 4  Chassis Ground 
(fused on radio’s PK Board at 3.15 amps) 
26  HKSW  P3 pin 3  Hookswitch Digital Input. 
Active = Ground. Inactive = Open 
25  INP2  P3 pin 5  Digital Input 2 
28  SWA+  P3 pin 6  Switched A+ (DC Power) Output 
8  GND  P4 pin 1  Chassis ground (fused on PK Board at 3-amps) 
30  DGPS_DATA  P4 pin 4  GPS Serial Data 
4  EXTRX  P4 pin 5  External Rx Audio Output (for non-CAN based radio) 
9  EXTMOD  P4 pin 7  External Tx Audio Input (for non-CAN based radio) 
3  SDATA  P4 pin 8 
In a front-mount M5300/M7300 radio installation, this pin 
for the siren/PA interface is the siren serial data output 
(open-collector/open-drain) from the radio’s mounted 
(local) CH-721. It serially transfers siren and light control 
data from the head/radio to a connected third-party siren 
and light system (e.g., Federal Signal SS2000
SmartSiren®). Data rate = 1200 bps. For a remote-mount 
radio installation, see footnote 2. 
5  FDISC  P4 pin 9  Buffered Discriminator Audio  
13  ALO  P4 pin 10  Audio Ground/Reference 
(fused on radio’s PK Board at 3.15 amps) 
12  MICHI  P4 pin 11  In a front-mount M5300/M7300 radio installation, these 
two pins provide the public address (PA) mic audio from 
2  In a remote-mount M5300/M7300 mobile radio installation, this pin on the radio’s DB-44 connector should not be used. It 
is not functional. Instead, the respective pin on the CH-721 Option Cable’s female DB-25 pin connector. See Section 11.3 
for additional information. 

MM-014763-001 
57 
Table 11-1:  M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001 Interconnections 
44-PIN I/O 
CABLE 
CONNECTOR 
P1 PIN 
SIGNAL NAME  TO/FROM  DESCRIPTION 
1  EXTALO  P4 pin 12 
the mounted (local) CH-721 to the siren and light system 
(e.g., Federal Signal SS2000 SmartSiren®). For a 
remote-mount radio installation, see footnote 2. 
14  VOLHI  P4 pin 13  Volume High  
15  CTLON  P4 pin 14  Control On Digital Output (for non-CAN based radio) 
16  XTONEENC  P4 pin 15  External Tone Encode Audio (for non-CAN based radio) 
17  XTONEDEC  P4 pin 16  External Tone Decode Audio (for non-CAN based radio)
6  EXTALO  P4 pin 17  External Audio Output (Balanced, Low; for non-CAN 
based radio) 
24  HORNRING  P4 pin 18 
In a front-mount M5300/M7300 radio installation, this pin 
for the siren/PA interface is the horn/ring logic input to the 
radio’s mounted (local) CH-721. When a connected third-
party siren and light system (e.g., Federal Signal 
SmartSiren® SS2000) has its horn/ring function active, 
this input is used to signal the head/radio as such. For a 
remote-mount radio installation, see footnote 2. 
23  SONOFF  P4 pin 19 
In a front-mount M5300/M7300 radio installation, this pin 
for the siren/PA interface is the siren on/off logic output 
(open-collector) from the radio’s mounted (local) CH-721.
It is the signal that powers the connected third-party siren 
and light system (e.g., Federal Signal SmartSiren®
SS2000) on and off. For a remote-mount radio 
installation, see footnote 2. 
18  INP1  P4 pin 21  Digital Input 1 (for non-CAN based radio) 
2  OUT1  P4 pin 22  Digital Output 1 (open-collector; for non-CAN based 
radio) 
29  TXENB+  P4 pin 23  Transmit Enable B+ (for non-CAN based radio) 
27  EXTMIC  P4 pin 24  External Mic Audio Input 
28  SWA+  P4 pin 25  Switched A+ DC Power Output 
(for non-CAN based radio) 
32  GPS_NMEA_RX  P5 pin 2  Serial Rx Input for GPS NMEA-Formatted Serial Data 
31  GPS_NMEA_TX  P5 pin 3  Serial Tx Output for GPS NMEA-Formatted Serial Data 
7  GND  P5 pin 5  Ground for GPS Serial Data Signals 
(fused on radio’s PK Board at 3.15 amps) 
11  IGNITION  (no connection)  Unused/Spare ignition sense input. 
33 
through 
44  —  (no connections) These pins of P1 are not used/not connected. 

MM-014763-001 
58 
11.2  SERIAL PROGRAMMING CABLE CA-013671 
Serial Programming Cable CA-013671-010 (10 feet long) and CA-013671-020 (20 feet long) can be used 
to program and configure the M7300 mobile radio via a Personal Computer. This cable has a female 
DB-9 connector on one end for connection to the PC’s serial port and a male DB-9 connector on the other 
end for connection to the serial port on the rear of the radio. The cable’s assembly and wiring diagrams 
are shown in Figure 11-2 below. 
(Made From PS-CA-013671 Rev. -) 
Figure 11-2:  Programming Cables CA-013671-010 and -020 

MM-014763-001 
59 
11.3  CH-721 OPTION CABLE CA-011854-001 
CH-721 Option Cable CA-011854-001 can be used to connect optional equipment to the 25-pin 
D-subminiature (DB-25) connector on the rear of the CH721. This cable expands the connections 
available at the 25-pin connector to three (3) separate connectors. The cable’s assembly and wiring 
diagrams are shown in Figure 11-3 below. 
(Made From PS-CA-011854 Rev. D) 
Figure 11-3:  CH-721 Option Cable CA-011854-001 

MM-014763-001 
60 
11.4  CH-721 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CABLE CA-104861 
Serial Programming Cable CA-104861 (5 feet) can be used to program and configure the CH-721 control 
head via a Personal Computer. This cable has a female DB-9 connector on one end for connection to the 
PC’s serial port and a male DB-9 connector on the other end for connection to the serial port on the rear 
of the head. The cable’s assembly and wiring diagrams are shown in Figure 11-4 below. 
(Made From PS-CA-104861 Rev. A) 
Figure 11-4:  Programming Cable CA-104861 

MM-014763-001 
61 
12  GPS NMEA-FORMATTED SERIAL DATA 
CONNECTION 
To obtain GPS NMEA-formatted serial data from the radio, use of the M5300/M7300 Option Cable 
CA-012349-001 is required. Follow this procedure to complete the GPS NMEA-formatted serial data 
connections: 
1. Obtain M5300/M7300 Option Cable CA-012349-001.  Each “leg” of this cable is approximately 
65 inches long (166 centimeters). 
2. Connect the cable’s 44-pin D-subminiature (DB-44) male connector to the DB-44 female connector 
on the rear panel of the radio. Tighten the two jackscrews with a small flathead screwdriver. Do not 
over-tighten. 
3. Connect the cable’s DB-9 female connector to the computer’s serial port DB-9 male connector — 
either directly or with an optional MAMROS0055 serial cable — and tighten the screws until firm. 
Route the cabling as required. 
4. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions on processing the NMEA-formatted GPS data from the radio. 
If the M5300/M7300 Option Cable is not available, a 3-wire serial cable can be field-
fabricated. On the radio end, this cable must interface to the three GPS-related signals of 
the radio’s 44-pin I/O Cable connector (pins 7, 31 and 32). See Table 11-1 for additional 
information. 
Industry software to process GPS information through this interface is not supported by 
M/A-COM. 

MM-014763-001 
62 
13  INITIAL POWER-UP TEST 
1. At the radio’s main waterproof (HFB-type) fuse holder installed near the vehicle battery, insert the 
15-amp AGC-type fuse that was included with the radio’s DC Power Cable. 
2. Tie and stow all fuse holders at this location to prevent excess vibration/movement. 
3. Carefully reconnect the vehicle’s battery ground cable. 
4. If not already, temporarily connect the mobile antenna cable from the vehicle-mounted 900 MHz 
antenna to the female TNC RF connector on the rear panel of the radio. This is a temporary 
connection until test procedures in Section 14 are complete. 
5. If the radio is equipped with the GPS receiver option, permanently connect the antenna cable from the 
GPS antenna (or mobile/GPS combo antenna) to the female SMA connector on the rear panel of the 
radio. The male SMA connector on most GPS antenna cables has a 5/16-inch hex collar, so the use of 
a wrench of this same size is normally required for tightening. However, some may have collars with 
only knurled surfaces, so a standard wrench or torque wrench cannot be used. In either case, do not 
over tighten the connector and do not twist the cable when tightening. 
6. If the installation is wired so the vehicle’s ignition key/switch turns the radio on and off, turn the 
switch to the Accessory or Run position. 
7. If the control head is not already powered up, do so by rotating its on/off/volume control clockwise 
out of the detent position. 
8. Verify the control head has powered-up by observing its display. If the display is not lit, refer to 
Section 8.2.1 as necessary. 
Unlike many mobile radio products, the radio powers-up to the state of last control. 
As long as the software configuration parameters have been loaded, successful installation is almost 
immediately realized: 
• After a short boot-up sequence, the control head displays login information and/or a talk group. 
• If no errors are displayed, the installation is most-likely properly wired. 
• If an error is displayed, recheck all cable connections, verify all fuses are properly installed, and 
verify battery power on the load side of the fuses, etc. If problems persist, contact M/A-COM’s 
Technical Assistance Center (see page 16). 
• Consult the Operator’s Manual for operational information. 
Refer to the following section for performance test information. 

MM-014763-001 
63 
14 PERFORMANCE TESTS 
This section includes procedures to verify the performance of the installation’s mobile antenna system. 
There are three (3) procedures in this section: 
• Changing Operating Mode for Tests 
• Testing by Transmitting into a Dummy Load (a 50-Ohm RF Terminator) 
• Testing by Transmitting into the Mobile Antenna 
CAUTION  
The accuracy of test results depends upon a DC power source in the range of 13.8 to 
16 volts DC, with a current capacity of greater than 8 amps. Make sure the vehicle’s 
battery is fully charged by running the engine for a few minutes before the test, and 
keep the engine running during the test procedures. Abide by the following 
WARNING! 
If the vehicle’s engine must remain running, the vehicle location should be well 
ventilated so exhaust fumes from the engine do not cause harm! 
CAUTION  
If a vehicle equipped with this radio requires jump-starting, the radio installation’s 
main AGC fuse (15-amp) should be removed from the holder prior to jump-starting. 
Doing so will prevent damage to the radio system. 
Prior to installation, the radio’s power level should be configured appropriately. The 
wide range of power levels indicated in the following procedures takes into account 
such things as: customer’s requirements; measurement errors, especially to include 
uncalibrated equipment; cabling losses; and voltage and temperature variations. By no 
means should the result from Performance Testing in this section be construed as the 
exact value of power level output from the radio, as the value is set and more 
accurately measured in the factory. The values obtained in these test procedures 
determine a successful installation only. 
14.1  CHANGING OPERATING MODE FOR TESTS 
To complete tests in this section, placing the radio in a conventional mode and using an average-
responding wattmeter to measure RF transmit power is recommended. However, if the radio is not 
programmed for conventional mode operations (i.e., OTP mode is available but ECP mode is not), tests 
will require a peak-reading RF wattmeter to measure RF transmit power. To select either conventional or 
OpenSky mode, use one of the following procedures: 
14.1.1  Changing from OpenSky to Conventional 
1. If necessary, apply power to the radio and turn it on. 
2. Use the control head’s •/•• Ramp Control to scroll through the menu until Mode Menu appears in 
the middle line of the display. This control is shown in Figure 8-4 and in Figure 8-5 on page 44. 
3. Use the +/- Ramp Control to select an available conventional channel/system. 

MM-014763-001 
64 
4. Confirm the selection by pressing the MENU button, then toggling the Ramp Control once (to 
select  Y for Yes), followed by pressing the MENU button again. The radio will enter the selected 
mode as indicated by the display. 
5. Select a conventional channel for test transmissions using either the •/•• Ramp Control or the 
System/Group/Channel Selection Control (required control per programming). 
14.1.2  Changing from Conventional to OpenSky 
1. If necessary, apply power to the radio and turn it on. 
2. Use the control head’s •/•• Ramp Control to scroll through the menu until an OpenSky system’s 
name is displayed. 
3. After a few seconds, the radio will automatically transition to OTP mode for operations on the 
selected OpenSky system. 
4. If the radio is not programmed for auto-login, login to the OpenSky system. For login instructions, 
refer to the Operator’s Manual (publication MM-014716-001) or the respective Quick-Guide 
(publication MM-014368-001) as necessary. The Quick-Guide is included with the radio when it 
shipped from the factory. 
5. Select a talk group for test transmissions using either the •/•• Ramp Control or the System/-
Group/Channel Selection Control (required control per programming). 
14.2  REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT 
Table 14-1:  Required Test Equipment 
TEST EQUIPMENT MODEL / PART NUMBER & DESCRIPTION 
Average-Responding 
Wattmeter 
(for conv. measurements) 
Bird Electronic Corp. Model 43 (or equivalent) with Type N female 
connectors at input and output ports. 
Peak-Reading 
Wattmeter 
(for OpenSky measurements) 
Bird Electronic Corp. Model 4314B (or equivalent) with Type N female 
connectors at input and output ports. 
Wattmeter 
Slug  Bird Electronic Corp. Element 25E, 25 watts, 400 - 1000 MHz (or 
equivalent). 
RF Coaxial 
Jumper Cable 
Pasternack Enterprises PE3661-36 (or equivalent) 50-Ohm Coaxial Cable 
with TNC male connector and Type N male connector, approximately three 
(3) feet in length. The utilized cable must have VSWR below 1.5:1 within 
the RF passband. 
N-to-TNC 
RF Adapter 
Pasternack Enterprises PE9090 (or equivalent) Type N male to TNC female 
adapter. Required to connect the cable of the vehicle-mounted 
700/800 MHz antenna to the wattmeter. 
50-Ohm RF Terminator 
(“Dummy Load”)  Pasternack Enterprises PE6106 (or equivalent) 50-ohm RF terminator rated 
at greater than 50 watts power, with Type N male connector. 
Vehicle-Mounted 
Antenna  Tests are performed with the vehicle-mounted 700/800 MHz antenna per 
the installation described in Section 6 of this manual. 
or 

MM-014763-001 
65 
14.3  TRANSMITTING INTO A DUMMY LOAD 
1. Using the Type N male to TNC male RF coaxial jumper cable, connect the radio’s antenna connector 
to the wattmeter’s input connector. Refer to Figure 14-1 as necessary. 
2. Connect the 50-ohm dummy load to the wattmeter’s output connector, in place of the antenna cable 
from the vehicle-mounted 700/800 MHz antenna. 
As previously stated, if conventional mode is not available per radio programming 
(i.e., OTP mode is available but ECP mode is not), a peak-reading RF wattmeter is 
required to measure RF transmit power. Otherwise, the use of an average-responding 
wattmeter is recommended.  Recommended wattmeter types are listed in Table 14-1. 
3. If not already, turn the radio on and set it to the required operating mode (based upon available radio 
programming and test equipment). Refer to Section 14.1 as necessary. 
4. Set the radio to a test talk group or conventional channel, if available. 
It is recommended that a test talk group/channel be allocated for this testing. This 
same group should be used during the antenna test procedure which is presented in the 
subsequent section. 
 Wattmeter 
Type N-to-TNC
RF Ada ptor 
TNC Male-to-Type N Female 
Coaxial Jumper Cable 
Slug 
(25 W, 400–
1000 MHz)  Dummy 
Load 
V
ehicle-Mounted 
700/800 MHz  
Antenna 
IN
OUT 
M7300 
Mobile Radio 
(Rear View) 
Radio’s DC 
Power Cable 
Installation’s DC 
Power Cable 
From 13.8-Volt 
Fused Power Source 
3
-Pin 
Connectors 
NOTE: CAN cable 
connections not indicated. 
Figure 14-1:  Wattmeter Connections for Antenna System Tests 
5. Position the wattmeter’s slug to measure forward RF output power. Rotate it if necessary. The arrow 
on the face of the slug must point away from the radio and towards the dummy load for forward 
power measurements. 

MM-014763-001 
66 
6. For conventional mode transmissions, set the wattmeter to measure average RF power. 
For OpenSky mode transmissions, set the wattmeter to measure peak RF power. 
7. Key the radio’s transmitter via the microphone’s PTT button. 
8. For an OpenSky mode transmission, compare the wattmeter’s reading with the target RF output 
power range of between 11.8 and 18.9 watts (15 watts ±1 dB). This transmit output power range 
assumes the radio is currently configured for high-power transmit. 
For a conventional mode transmission, compare the wattmeter’s read with the target RF output power 
range of between 27.7 and 44.2 watts (35 watts ±1 dB). This transmit output power range assumes 
the radio is currently configured for the high-power transmit. 
Transmit only for as long as needed to take the measurement, then immediately 
disable the transmission. 
9. If the wattmeter reading is within the range, record the measured value in the appropriate space on 
the data collection form near the end of this manual. 
If the wattmeter reading is outside the range, verify the radio’s power supply voltage (i.e., battery 
voltage) is within the specified range, recheck all connections and measure the RF output power 
again. If this fails to produce a reading within the range, replace it and repeat this procedure. If 
problems persist, contact M/A-COM’s Technical Assistance Center (see page 16). 
14.4 TRANSMITTING INTO THE MOBILE ANTENNA 
1. Connect the antenna cable from the vehicle-mounted 700/800 MHz antenna to the wattmeter as 
shown in Figure 14-1. 
2. If not already, turn the radio on and set it to the required operating mode (based upon available radio 
programming and test equipment). Refer to Section 14.1 as necessary. 
3. Set the radio to a test talk group or conventional channel, if available. 
It is recommended that a test talk group/channel be allocated for this testing. 
Otherwise, interference with other radio users in the system may occur. Also, during 
transmissions, always observe the RF exposure-related safety information 
presented in Section 1.2 (begins on page 6). 
4. Position the wattmeter’s slug to measure forward RF output power. Rotate it if necessary. The arrow 
on the face of the slug must point away from the radio and towards the antenna for forward power 
measurements. 
5. For conventional mode transmissions, set the wattmeter to measure average RF power. 
For OpenSky mode transmissions, set the wattmeter to measure peak RF power. 
6. Key the radio’s transmitter via the microphone’s PTT button. 
7. For an OpenSky mode transmission, compare the wattmeter’s reading with the target RF output 
power range of between 11.8 and 18.9 watts (15 watts ±1 dB). This transmit output power range 
assumes the radio is currently configured for high-power transmit. 
For a conventional mode transmission, compare the wattmeter’s read with the target RF output power 
range of between 27.7 and 44.2 watts (35 watts ±1 dB). This transmit output power range assumes 
the radio is currently configured for the high-power transmit. 

MM-014763-001 
67 
Transmit only for as long as needed to take the measurement, then immediately 
disable the transmission. 
8. If the wattmeter reading is within the range, record the value in the appropriate space on the data 
collection form near the end of this manual. 
If the wattmeter reading is outside the range, verify the radio’s power supply voltage (i.e., battery 
voltage) is within the specified range, recheck all connections, and measure the forward power again.   
If these checks/corrections fail to produce a reading within the range, check all cabling and 
connections and repeat the testing procedure to this point. In the event the wattmeter reading still falls 
outside the range, replace the antenna, make sure all connections are seated firmly, and repeat the 
testing procedure. If problems persist, contact M/A-COM’s Technical Assistance Center (see page 
16). 
9. Position the wattmeter’s slug to measure reverse (reflected) RF power from the antenna. The arrow 
on the face of the slug must point away from the antenna and to the radio to measure reverse power. 
10. Key the radio’s transmitter via the microphone’s PTT button. 
11. Compare the wattmeter reading with the RF power output range of 2 watts or less. 
Transmit only for as long as needed to take the measurement, then immediately disable 
the transmission. 
12. If the wattmeter reading is within the range, record the value in the appropriate space on the data 
collection form near the end of this manual. 
If the wattmeter reading is outside the range, make sure the antenna is consistent with the specified 
frequency range of the radio. Recheck all antenna connections, and measure the reverse power again. 
If the installation employs a ¼-wave unity-gain antenna, observe the NOTE that follows step 8.  If 
these checks/corrections fail to produce a reading within the range, replace the antenna and repeat the 
entire antenna test procedure. Any value exceeding the maximum allowable reflected power value 
will result in a diminished RF output signal. If problems persist, contact M/A-COM’s Technical 
Assistance Center (see page 16). 
13. Disconnect the coaxial cable jumper and wattmeter. 
14. Permanently connect the cable from the vehicle-mounted 700/800 MHz antenna to the radio’s 
antenna cable by mating the two TNC connectors together. Use two pairs of soft-jaw pliers to gently 
tighten this connection. Do not over tighten and do not twist either cable. 
15. Make several test calls on the radio system to verify operation of the mobile radio. Before making the 
calls, select other talk groups or conventional channels, as required to verify operation. 
To prevent RF leakage and ensure peak performance, make sure the RF connectors are 
tight, but do not over-tighten so connector damage will not occur. 
Improper installation of the RF cables may lead not only to poor radio 
performance but also to harmful exposure to RF electromagnetic energy. 

MM-014763-001 
68 
Testing is complete. The radio is now ready for normal communications. 

MM-014763-001 
69 
14.5 TEST PERFORMANCE DATA FORM 
Enter the information requested on this data collection form. Clip this form and file it as a permanent record of 
the tested performance of the M7300 mobile radio installation. 
Clip 
Here 
Company Performing Installation  Technician Performing Test 
Date of Test 
(mm/dd/yyyy) 
Mobile Radio Serial Number  Antenna Make and Model Numbers 
Power into a Dummy 
Load 
 Watts
Forward Power with 
Antenna  Reflected Power 
with Antenna 
Watts  
 Watts

MM-014763-001 
70 
15 COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION 
Double-check the following items before considering the installation completed: 
• Verify all newly installed mechanical hardware is mounted securely and all respective mounting 
hardware is tight. 
• Verify all electrical interconnections are connected properly and the associated connector attachment 
hardware is tight. Pay special attention to all RF antenna cables! 
• Verify all related fuses are correctly installed and properly rated. 
• Verify all electrical cables and wiring are tied, stowed, and protected so they are out of the way of 
casual contact, away from sources of extreme heat, and wire chafing cannot occur. Pay special 
attention to all RF antenna cables! 
• To prevent fumes from entering the vehicle’s passenger compartment, seal the hole/grommet/wire 
combination at the firewall with a silicon-based sealer. 
• Verify all vehicle components are properly reinstalled such as kick panels, headliners, and seats. 
• If the installation includes a separately-mounted on/off power switch for manually turning the radio 
(and possibly others systems) on and off, verify it is labelled accordingly. For example: “Radio 
ON/OFF.” 
• Remove all tools and unused hardware from the vehicle. 
• Verify the test performance data has been recorded on the data collection form shown in this manual. 

MM-014763-001 
71 
16 WARRANTY 
A.  M/A-COM, Inc. (hereinafter "Seller") warrants to the original purchaser for use (hereinafter "Buyer") 
that Equipment manufactured by or for the Seller shall be free from defects in material and 
workmanship, and shall conform to its published specifications. With respect to all non-M/A-COM 
Equipment, Seller gives no warranty, and only the warranty, if any, given by the manufacturer shall 
apply.  Rechargeable batteries are excluded from this warranty but are warranted under a separate 
Rechargeable Battery Warranty (ECR-7048). 
B.  Seller’s obligations set forth in Paragraph C below shall apply only to failures to meet the above 
warranties occurring within the following periods of time from date of sale to the Buyer and are 
conditioned on Buyer’s giving written notice to Seller within thirty (30) days of such occurrence: 
1.  for fuses and non-rechargeable batteries, operable on arrival only. 
2.  for parts and accessories (except as noted in B.1) sold by Seller’s Service Parts Operation, ninety 
(90) days. 
3.  for P7200, P7100IP, P5400, P5300, P5200, P5100, P3300, PANTHER™ 405P and 605P, M7300, 
M7200 (including V-TAC), M7100IP, M7300 and M3300 radios, two (2) years, effective 
10/01/2007. 
4.  for all other equipment of Seller’s manufacture, one (1) year. 
C.  If any Equipment fails to meet the foregoing warranties, Seller shall correct the failure at its option (i) 
by repairing any defective or damaged part or parts thereof, (ii) by making available at Seller’s factory 
any necessary repaired or replacement parts, or (iii) by replacing the failed Equipment with equivalent 
new or refurbished Equipment. Any repaired or replacement part furnished hereunder shall be 
warranted for the remainder of the warranty period of the Equipment in which it is installed. Where 
such failure cannot be corrected by Seller’s reasonable efforts, the parties will negotiate an equitable 
adjustment in price. Labor to perform warranty service will be provided at no charge during the 
warranty period only for the Equipment covered under Paragraph B.3 and B.4. To be eligible for no-
charge labor, service must be performed at a M/A-COM factory, by an Authorized Service Center 
(ASC) or other Servicer approved for these purposes either at its place of business during normal 
business hours, for mobile or personal equipment, or at the Buyer’s location, for fixed location 
equipment. Service on fixed location equipment more than thirty (30) miles from the Service Center or 
other approved Servicer’s place of business will include a charge for transportation. 
D.  Seller’s obligations under Paragraph C shall not apply to any Equipment, or part thereof, which (i) has 
been modified or otherwise altered other than pursuant to Seller’s written instructions or written 
approval or, (ii) is normally consumed in operation or, (iii) has a normal life inherently shorter than the 
warranty periods specified in Paragraph B, or (iv) is not properly stored, installed, used, maintained or 
repaired, or, (v) has been subjected to any other kind of misuse or detrimental exposure, or has been 
involved in an accident. 
E.  The preceding paragraphs set forth the exclusive remedies for claims based upon defects in or 
nonconformity of the Equipment, whether the claim is in contract, warranty, tort (including 
negligence), strict liability or otherwise, and however instituted. Upon the expiration of the warranty 
period, all such liability shall terminate. The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other 
warranties, whether oral, written, expressed, implied or statutory. NO IMPLIED OR STATUTORY 
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL 
APPLY. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, 
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES. 
This warranty applies only within the United States. 
M/A-COM, Inc.  M/A-COM, Inc. 
1011 Pawtucket Blvd.  221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 
Lowell, MA  01853  Lynchburg, VA 24501 
1-877-OPENSKY 1-800-528-7711  ECR-7047F 

Tyco Electronics Wireless Systems Segment 
221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 
Lynchburg, Virginia 24501 
(Outside USA, 1-434-385-2400) Toll Free 1-800-528-7711 
www.macom-wireless.com Printed in U.S.A.